Digital PDFs

EK-192AF-MG-F01

July 1993

409 pages

Original

14MB

view download

OCR Version

11MB

view download

Document:	MicroVAX and MicroPDP-11 Microsystems Options
Order Number:	EK-192AF-MG
Revision:	F01
Pages:	409
Original Filename:

OCR Text

MicroVAX and MicroPDP-11

Microsystems Options
Ordaer Number: EK-192AF-MG. FO1

July 1993
This manual contains Updat» Notice 5,
EK-289AE-UD. EO1.

October 1988
Updated, December 1988
Updated, September 1989
Updated, Movember 1891
Updated, May 1992
Updated, July 1993

The information in this document ia subject to change without notice and should not be construed
as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation.

Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this

document.

The software, if any, described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. No responsibility ir assumed for the use
or reliability of software or equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporstion or its
affiliated companies.

Restricted Rights: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrict’-ns
as set forth in subparagraph (c)1Xii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause
at DFARS 252.227-7013.

Copyright © Digital Equipment Corporation 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993. All Rights Reserved.
The Reader’s Comments form at the end of this document requests your critical evaluation to aasist
in preparing [iture docuinentation.
The following are trademark: of Digital Equipment Corporation: CompacTape, CX, DDCMP,
DEC, DECconnect, DECdirect, DECnet, DECscan, DECserver, DECUS, DECvoice, DECwindows,
DELNI, DEMPR, DESTA, DSRVB, IVAX, KDA, KLESI, MicroVAX, MicroVMS, MSCP, OpenVMS,
PATHWORKS, Q-bus, Q22-bus, RA, RQDX, RV20, SA, SDI, ThinWire, TK, TMSCP, TQK,
T&05, TU, VAX, VAXcluster, VAX DOCUMENT, VAXELN, VAXlab, VAXserver, VMS, VT, and
the DIGITAL logo.

IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. UNIX is a registered

trademark of UNIX Systems Laboratories.

FCC NOTICE: The equipment described in this document generates, uses, and may emit radio
frequency energy. The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such radio frequency interference when operated in a commercial
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference, in which
case the user at his own expense may be required to take measures to correct the interference.

82324

Preface
This guide provides reference, configuration, and maintenance information
for options supported by MicroVAX and MicroPDP-11 systems.

Intended Audience
This document is intended only for DIGITAL Field Service personnel and
qualified self-maintenance customers.

Organization
This guide contains an alphabetical listing of all microsystems options, an
overview that explains ordering procedures and module configuration, an
option section with pertinent information on each supported option, and
one appendix.

The option sections are arranged alphabetically, and each section starts
on page 1.

Each option section begins with a table of ordering information and
information on operating system support, diagnostic support, related
documentation, and dc power and bus loads. Each option section also
contains a description, configuration information, power-up self-tests,
and general maintenance information, including field replaceable units

(FRUs) and loopback connectors.

Appendix A provides a list of related documentation.

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Warnings, cautions, and notes appear throughout this guide. They have

the following meanings:
WARNING

Provides information to prevent personal injury.

CAUTION

Provides infermation to prevent damage to equipment or software

NOTE

Provides general information about the current topic

List of Options
This manual contains descriptions of the following options, which are supported
by MicroVAX 3000 and VAX 4000 systems. The options ending with an asterisk
are new to this revision:
AAV11-D, S Digital-to-Analog Converter
ADQ32-A, S Analog-to-Digital Converter
ADV11-D, —S Analog-to-Digital Converter
AXV11-C, -S Analog I/0 Module
CXA16/CXB16 16-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
CXYO08 8-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
DEFQA FDDIcontroller/Q-bus Adapter *

DELQA Ethernet Interface

DEQNA Ethernet Interface
DEQRA Token Ring Controller Adapter
DESQA Ethernet Adapter
DFAQ1 Modem
DHV11 8-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
DIV32 DEC ISNA Controller 100 (synchronous)
DLVJ1 4-Line Asynchronous Interface
DMV11 Synchronous Controller
DPV11 Synchronous Interface
DRQ3B-A, S High-Speed, Parallel Interface
DRV11-G, DRV1J-S 4-Line, High-Density Parallel Interface
DRV11-WA, DRV1W-S General-Purpose DMA Interface
DSV11 Communications Option
DTCO05 DECvoice Multivoice Processor
DZQ11 4-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
DZV11 4-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
EF51R Solid State Disk (SSD) *
EF52R Solid State Disk (SSD) *
EF53 Solid State Disk (SSD) *
IBQO1 BITBUS Controller
IEQ11 Communications Controller

KDA50-Q Disk Controller
KFQSA Storage Adapter
KZQSA Storage Adapter
KMV1A-M Programmable Communications Controller
KWV11-C, -S Programmable Real-Time Clock
LPV11/LP25 and LPV1VLP26 Printer Subsystems
MRV11-D PROM Module
RAG60 Disk Drive
RA70 Disk Drive
RAS81 Disk Drive
RAB82 Disk Drive
RA90 Disk Drive
RA92 Disk Drive
RC25 Disk Subsystem
RD31 and RD32 Diskette Drives
RD50-Series Disk Drives
RF30 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF31E Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF31F Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF31T Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF312 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF35E Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF352 Dual Integrated Storage Elements (ISE)
RF36E Integrated Storage Element (ISE) *
RF362 Dual Integrated Storage Element (ISE) *
RF71 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF72 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF'73 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
RF74 Integrated Storage Element (ISE) *
RQDX2 and RQDX3 Disk Controllers
RQDXE Expander Module
RRD40 Optical Disc Drive Subsystem
RRD42 Optical Disc Drive Subsystem
RRD50 Optical Disc Drive Subsystem
RWZ01 Magneto Optical Disk Drive
RX33 Diskette Drive
RX50 Diskette Drive

RZ58 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)

TF85 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
TF86 Cartridge Tape Subsystem *
TF867 Magazine Tape Subsystem *
TKZ60 Cartridge Tape Drive
TK50 Tape Drive Subsystem

TK70 Tape Drive Subsystem

TLZ04 Tape Cassette Drive Subsystem
TLZ06 Tape Cassette Drive Subsystem
TQK70 Controller
TS05 Tape Drive Subsystem
TSZ07 Tape Drive Subsystem
TZ85 Cartridge Tape Drive
TZ857 Magazine Tape Drive
TU81-PLUS Tape Drive
VCB02 Monochrome Video Monitor

Overview
This document describeb options supported by MicroVAX and MicroPDP11 systvms. The vptions are listed alphabetically and contain the following
information:
Ordering information

Operating system and diagnostic support available
Related documentation
Brief description
Configuration
Self-test
Loopback connectors
FRUs
Ordering Options

You order option parts based on the system enclosure.
Field Service
personnel can aiso order modules by the M number (For example, M7504
i1s a DEQNA-M module.)
For the BA23 and BA123 Enclosure, and H96842-J Cabinet

For most options, you must order two item numbers: amodule and a cabinet
kit. For example, you order the following two items if you are installing a
DEQNA Ethernet interface:
Item

Order Number

Module (M7504)

DEQNA-M

BA23-A cabinet kit, including

CK-DEQNA-KB

Type-A filter connector and internal cable

If you are replacing an option, you order only the parts needed.
For
example, if the hase module is faulty, order the module only. If a cable
or filter 1s faulty, order that part separately.

For the BA200-Series Enclosure
Cabinet kits are not necessary for modules designed for BA200-series

enclosures because these enclosures do not have separate /O panels. You
order the module only; the filtered 1/0 connector is part of the module’s
handle.
You can order a module in either of two ways:
®*

As a system option (factory installed in BA200-series enclosures)

In an upgrade kit, to be installed by Field Service.

vii

The module order number ends with -xA for a system option, or —xF for
a field up, ade kit. The x indicates a letter that varies from module to
module. For example, CXY08-AA is a system option, and CXY08-AF is an
upgrade kit. The upgrade kit includes cables, an installation manual, and
any other required components.

Only those options that specifically list BA200-series enclosures are
supported; check the ordering information at the beginning of each option.

Module Configuration
Each module in a system must use a unique device address and interrupt
vector. The device address is also known as the control and status register
(CSR) address.
Depending on the device, the CSR address and interrupt vector are either
fixed or floating.

A fixed CSR address or vector is an address reserved in memory for that
module. Fixed addresses and vectors are positioned at the factory. If you
have only one module of a certain type in the system, you do not need to
change the factory position. If you have two or more modules of the same
type, you must change the address and vector on each additional module.
A floating address or vector is a location assigned within an octal (base 8)
range. The exact address or vector depends on what other modules the
system contains. The ranges are as follows:
*

Floating CSR address: (1776)0010 to (1776)3776

Floating interrupt vector: {00000)300 to (00000774

NOTE: All CSR addresses and interrupt vectors listed in this document are
octal values.

You set most addresses and vectors by positioning switches or jumpers on
the module. Here is an example of the 22-bit setting for a CSR address of
17761540:
A 21
i

20 19 18 17

11111
?

15 14 13 12 11
1

10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
01
1

In most cases, you can set a CSR address within a typical range by using
bits A12 through A03. Bits 21 through 13 are usually all ones (1), and bits

viii

02 through 00 are usually all zeros (0). A typical switch setting shows only
the following bits:

Address Bits:
Switch Settings:

Al2 All AlQ AO09 AQO8 AO7 AO6 AOS5 A04 AQ03
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0

Address:

If you set bit A12 to 1, the address would be 17771540.

Similarly, you can set an interrupt vector of 320 by positioning bits V08
through V03. Bits V02 through V0O are usually all zeros (0).
Vector Bits:

v08 Vv07 v06 V05 V04 V03

Switch Settings:

\
Vector:

/
2

NOTE: The number of switches or jumpers used to control address and
vector bits vartes among modules.
Calculating address and vector values 1s a complex procedure, because some

modules use floating addresses and vectors. The value of a floating address
depends on what other moduies are in the system. For this reason, the
MicroVMS and VMS SYSGEN utility has a CONFIG program to determine
CSR addresses and interrupt vectors. The next section describes how to use
the CONY'IG program. If you do not have access to this program, you can

determine some common configurations using the information in the section
Finding CSR Addresses and Interrupt Vectors Manually. Use this section
only when the CONFIG program is not available.

Set CSR addresses and interrupt vectors for a module as follows:
1.

Determine the correct values for the module with the CONFIG program.

Find the section in this document that describes the module. That
section lists the switch and jumper settings for different CSR addresses
and interrupt vectors.

Most modules also have switches and jumpers to change their operating
characteristics. For some applications, you may have to change the factory
settings.

NOTE: Changing the factory settings may affect the operation of the
diagnostics for the deuvice.

Finding CSR Addresses and Interrupt Vectors with the CONFIG Program

Use the CONFIG program in the MicroVMS and VMS SYSGEN utility to
determine the correct CSR address and interrupt vector for a module. Type
in a list of the devices in the system, and CONFIG automatically provides
CSR address and interrupt vector information. Table 1 lists the devices
supported by this utility.

Table 1:
Device

Device Abbreviations Used with SYSGEN
Enter at

Enter at

DEVICE> Prompt

Device

DEVICE> Prompt

CXAl6

DHV11

DZV11

DZ11

CXYo08
DEQNA

DHV11
QNA

IEQI
KDA3?0

IEQ11
UDA

DHV11

LPV1

LPI11

DLVJ1

DJ11

RC25

UDA

DMVI1I-M

DMV11

RQDX2

ubDA

DMV1I-N

DMVl

RQDX3

UDA

DPV11

RRD50

VDA

DRV1I-WA

DR1IW

TQK50

TUR1

DZQ11

DZ11

TSV05

TS11

The CONFIG program uses a standard Q22-bus algorithm to determine
the correct CSR address and interrupt vector for a module. You must use
this program so that the operating system (MicroVMS or VMS) and MDM
diagnostics can recognize the CSR addresses and interrupt vectors. You
can also use these settings in ULTRIX-32m and VAXELN systems.
To use the SYSGEN utility, type the following at the system command
prompt.:

$ MCR SYSGEN

Press [fewm} The utility responds with the prompt
SYSGEN>

At this prompt, type
CONF IGURE

Press [Rewn]. The utility responds with the prompt
DEVICE>

At this point, enter the abbreviation for each device you are going to use in
the system. Table 1 lists the abbreviations.

Enter one abbreviation per line, then press (Rewn]. The DEVICE> prompt will
prompt for you for another entry. If you are installing more than one unit
of a particular device, enter a comma and the number of devices after the
abbreviation. For example, DHV11, 2 indicates two DHV 11 modules.

After you have entered all devices, type [z, The program displays the
following information for each device you entered:
CSR address and vector

The name assigned to the device by the operating system
The operating system support status (yes or no)

The program uses an asterisk (*) to indicate a floating address or vector. To
exit from the SYSGEN utility, type EXIT at the sYSGEN> prompt and press
[Return],
Example 1 shows a sample SYSGEN utility display.

Example 1:
SMCR

Sample Output Using the CONFIGURE Command

\SYSGEN

SYSGEN> CONFIGURE
DEVICE> DHV11,2
DEVICE> DMV11l
DEVICE> QNA

DEVICE> UDA,
2
DEVICE> TUS81

DEVICE> CTRL/Z

Device:

UDA

Name:

PUA CSR:

772150

Vector:

154

Support:

yes

Device:

TUB1L

Name:

PTA CSR:

774500

Vector:

260

Support:

yes

Device:

QNA

Name:

XQA CSR:

774440

Vector:

120

Supprrt:

yes

Device:
Device:

DMV1l
UDA

Name:
Name:

XDA CSR:
PUB CSR:

760320* Vector:
760354* Vector:

300* Support:
310* Support:

yes
yes

Device:
Device:

DHV11
DHV1]

Name:
Name:

TXA CSR:
TXB CSR:

760500* Vector:
760520* Vector:

320*
330*

yes
yes

Support:
Support:

Finding CSR Addresses and Interrupt Vectors Manually

if the CONFIG program in the SYSGEN utility is not available, you can
determine some CSR addresses and interrupt vectors using Table 2. This
table lists some common option modules with their standard CSR address
and interrupt vector settings. Go to column 4. Put a check mark next
to each module in the system. An F in the table indicates a floating
CSR address or interrupt vector. The next two sections describe how to
determine floating CSR addresses and interrupt vectors. If you use more
units of a device than are listed in the table, those units have floating CSR
addresses and interrupt vectors unless otherwise specified.

Table 2:

CSR Address and Interrupt Vector Worksheet

Option

Module

AAV11-D
ADV11-D

Unit

Number

Check!

Vector

CSR Address

A1009

[

17776420

A1008

[

17776410

DEQNA

M7504

[

120

17774440

DHV11

M3104

DLVJ1!

M8043

17776500

DLVJ1

MB043

17776510

DMV

M8953

DMVI11-CP

M8064

DPV11

M8020

DRV11-JP

MB049

[

]

17764120

DRV11-JP

MB049

17764100

DRV11-JP

MB049

17764060

DRV11-WA

M7651

124

17772410

DRV11-WA

M7651

[

17772430

DZQ

Ma3106

[

DZV11

M7957

[

1EQ1I

M8634

[

17764100

KA630

M7606

[

KDAS50

M7164

[

154

17772150

KMV11

M7500

[

KWvii-C

M4002

17770420

LPV1i

M8o27

[

200

MRVi1-D

M8578

[

MS5630-A

M760x

RC25

M7740

154

17772150

RLV12

M8061

160

17774400

RQDX2

M8639

154

17772150

RQDX3

M7555

154

17772150

TQKS50

M7546

[

260

17774500

M7165

17777514

"The DLVJ1 vector can be set only at 300, 340, 400, 440, and =0 on.

If the first available

vector is 310 (or 320, 330), you should set the DLVJ1 to 340 and the next device to 400.

Xii

Floating Interrupt Vectors

Floating interrupt vectors start at 300g and continue in increments of 10g,
with one exception. The device following a DLVJ1 uses an increment of
40g. You assign floating interrupt vectors in the following order:
DLVJ1 (Increment of 40g to next device)
DRV11
DZV11, DZQ11
DPV11
DMV11
Second MSCP (The first is fixed at 154g.)

Second TQKS50 (The first is fixed at 260g.)

IEQ11
DHV11

Examples: The following examples show the floating interrupt vectors for
two sample configurations:
Example

Example 2

DLVJ1

300

DzQ11

pzvill

340

Second MSCP

310

DMV11

350

DHV11

320

Second MSCP

360

DHV11

370

300

The CXA16 and CXY08 communications devices for the BAZ200-series
enclosure also have floating interrupt vectors. You should assign the first
floating interrupt vector in the BA213 to the CXA16.

xili

Floating CSR Addresses
Table 3 lists floating CSR addresses for many possible system
configurations. To find the configuration you want, find a column that
includes all the devices 1n your system that need floating addresses.
Columns 1 through 9 are for systems without a KMV11 module. Columns 10
through 18 are for systems with a KMV11. A KMV11 changes the settings
for the DHV11 modules below it in the column.

NOTE: The CXY08 and CXAl6 communications devices for the BA213
enclosure use the same floating CSR addresses as the DHV]1.
Table 3 lists devices in the correct order for assigning floating CSR
addresses. If you add or remove a device with a floating CSR address,
you often have to recalculate the floating CSR addresses of devices below
it in the list.

However, a C5R address with an asterisk (*) in the table does not affect the
other addresses in the column. For example, you could use column 1 for a
system with one DHV11 module and one or two TK50 tape drives. Adding
or removing a second TK50 tape drive from this system does net change

the address of the DHV11.

An address without an asterisk does affect the addresses below it in the
same column. For example, suppose you use column 1 to configure a system
with two DHV11s. If you add a second MSCP device to this system later,
you must change the CSR addresses of the DHV11s. Column 2 lists the
correct CSR addresses for the new configuration.
Examples:
The following examples show the correct floating CSR
addresses for two sample configurations. You can find these addresses in
Table 3.
Example

DZQl1l:

17760100

DpPV1l:

17760270

DPV11l:

17760310

2nd MSCP:

17760354

DHV11:

17760500

KMV11l:

17760460

DHV11:

17760520

From column

Xiv

Example

From column

12.

Floating CSR Addresses: Sample Contigurations

Table 3:

100
110~
120+

DTv/Q 1
pzv/Q 2
pzv/qQ 3

100
110*

310*

270%

270"

DPV11

330%*

310#

330«

310"

340

360

340

374

414

120

504

2nd TQK

DHV1i

1
2
3

DHV11
DHV1l

4
5

100
110*

100
110%*

354+

MSCP

100
110

100
110
120

DMV11

DHV11
DHV11

Supstitute the numbers below for the nnn in 17760nnn

Device

2nd

15
for

Substitute the numbars

Device

100
110+

pzv/Q 1
pzv/Q 2
pzZv/Q 3

120*

270

DPV11

the

17760nnn

100
110
120

100
110»

100
110
120

100
110*

330+

310~

330+

310*

340

360

340

374

414*

DMV11

354

2nd MsCp

nnn

2nd TQK

504

444+

KMV11

520

460

560
600
620
640
660

B o

e e

e Tm

S e

e e e e

e =

D AW W e T

4 T A

e A

L W A Aty W em T

e S AP e W

MLO-000263

Module Self-Tests
Module self-tests run only when you power up the system. A module selftest can detect hard or repeatable errors, but not intermittent errors.
You can repeat module self-tests by pressing {Fesan. The module’s LEDs
display pass/fail test vesults. You can find detailed information in the
command status register (CSR) of the module’s Q22-bus interface; see the
user’s guide for the module.
A self-test that passes does not guarantee that the module is good, because
the test checks only the controller logic. The test does not check the
module’s Q22-bus interface, line drivers and receivers, or connector pins—
all of which have relatively high failure rates.
A self-test that fails is accurate, because the test does not require any other
part of the system to be working,.

Using a Loopback Connector
You use a loopback cennector with the MicroVAX Diagnostic Menitor (MDM)
utilities for troubleshooting communications problems in the system. You
can install the loopback connector at different points to isolate a problem
to a faulty /O panel, internal cable, or module (Figure 1).
Start at the system’s I/0 panel, to see if the problem is in the system
enclosure, the external cabling, or the attached device. If the test fails,
move the loopback point closer to the CPU until 1t passes. The faulty FRU
is between the point where the test last fails and the point where it passes.
If symptoms change while you are troubleshooting, check all cable
connections and start again. You may have introduced a bad connection
while performing the procedure.

Xvi

L aunBy
/0 PANEL

INSERT

\,
TM

LINE DRIVERS

AND RECEIVERS

TERMINAL

MODEM

Q22 bus

INTERFACE

tflgg‘%“

COMPUTER

IAX

MLO-O0347

J0}22UN0Y) RoeqgdooT B8 Buisn

LINE DRIVERS
AND R)‘ECECVERS

AAV11/A1009

AAV11-D, -S Digital-to-Analog Converter
Ordering Information
Module (A1009) for BA23
BA123, and H9642-J
Module (A1009-PA) for
BA200-series

AAVI1I-D

Cabinet kit (BA23)

CK-AAVID-KA

Cabinet kit (BA123)

CK-AAVID-KUC

UDIP parts

See Table 2 in this section.

AAV11-5A (factory 1installed)
AAV11-SF (field upgrade)

Operating System Support
Mic—oVMS

Version 4.4 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

RSX-11M

Version 4 3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 3 0 and later

VMS

Version 5.0 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

Diagnostic Support

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXpp
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 1 08 (release 108) and later

Version 2.1 (release 1341 and later:
VAAAA1 BIC, VADACU.BIC, XAACB0O OBJ
See module documentation.

Microsystems Options

AAV11/A1009

Documentation
EK-AV11D-UG

Q-Bus DMA Analog S»stem User's Guide

EK-UDIPD-RC

Universal Data Interface Panel Referen..
Card

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+HV

+12V

Watts

Insert

AAV1I-D
AAV11-8A

A1009
Al1009-SA

18
1.8

0.0
0.0

9.0
9.0

1.0
2.1

1.0
05

The AAV11-D, -Sis a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) with direct memory
access (DMA) capability. The AAV11-D is shown in Figure 1.
The AAV11-D is a dual-height module. with full 22-bit addressing and
four interrupt levels controlled by jumpers. Outputs include two analog
DAC outputs, a digital two-pulse valid data indicator, and four independent
digital TTL control lines.

The AAV11 provides two possible throughput levels:
One channel

200 kHz maximum

Two channels

300 kHz

Microsystems Options

AAV11/A1009

Figure 1:

AAV11-D Module Layout (A1009)
—_

W58
EB W16

W10

W‘“fi

CDE ML
wifl W3 W2

EW'I?

W17

@ B B

w2e BB EEWS

CZE3

W36 W37
W34

W35

00020

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Use jumpers W18 through W33 to set the CSR address and interrupt vector
for the AAV11. The CSR address is fixed for the first AAV11. All interrupt
vectors float. The following tables list the factory configuration for the CSR
address and interrupt vector:
AAV1i-D,

-8

CSR Address:

Jumpers

W18

through W27

17776420

(factory

position)

Address Bits:

Al2

All Al10

Jumpers:

wisg

W19 W20 W21

W22 W23 W24

W25 W26 W27

CSR Address:

17776420
1

installed,

removed

Microsystems Options

AAV11/A1009
AAV11i-D, ~S Interrupt Vector:
Jumpers W28 through W33

330

(factory position)

Vector Bitg:

v4d

Jumpers:

W28 W29 W30

Vé

W31 W32 w33

Vactor Address:

330
300

0
0

1 = installed,

1
1

0 = removed.

The interrupt priority levels for the AAV11 are as follows:
Priority

Level

W15

Wié

Out

In (factory)

QOut

Out

AAV11-D, -S User-Selectable Jumper Features
The AAV11-D, -8 has a variety of user-selectable features, which are
controlled by jumpers.
These features set parameters for specific
applications. The customer should select the features.
Table 1 lists the user-selectable features and the factory configuration. To
change any of the features, refer to the module documentation.

Table 1:

AAV11-D, -S User-Selectable Features

Feature

Factory

Configuration

Jumpers

Continuous Mode DMA

Enabled

w10

DMA Wrap Mode

Enabled

W17

Digital/analog ground

Not connected

X~DAC output range

+/~10 Volts

W1, W2, W3

Y-DAC output range

+/-10 Volts

W4, W5, W6

X-DAC data coding

Two's complement

W34, W3s

Y-DAC data coding

Two’s complement

W36, W37

Z-pulse width

3.5 microseconds

W8, w9

Z-pulse delay

350 nanoseconds

wWil, wi2

Z-pulse polarity

3.5 microseconds

Wi3, Wi4

Microsystems Options

AAV11/A1009

To facilitate connections to the AAV11-D, —S, you can use a universal data
interface panel (UDIP). This panel provides BNC cable connectors and
push-tab barrier strips for making cabling connections. The panel, like
other universal data interface panels, is installed in a UDIP-BA mounting
box. Up to three paneis can be installed in a mounting box. The mounting
box/panel assembly can then be installed in any standard media mounting
slot normally used for TK50, RX50, or RD50-series media devices. The
mounting box can also be mounted in a tabletop (UDIP-TA) expansion box
for use as an external connection box.
Table 2 lists the UDIP components required for each type of configuration.

Tabie 2:

AAV11 UDIP Components

Module

Enclosure

Front
Panel

Mounting
Box

Tabletop
Box

Other
Items

AAV11-S

BA20C series

UDIP-DB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

None

AAV1I-D

8319y

UDIP-DA

UDIP-BA

None

UDIP-DB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-ADVID-KC

UDIP-DB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-ADV1ID-KA

media slot

AAV1i-D

BA123 with
tabletop

AAV11I-D

BA23 with
tabletop

Microsystems Options

ADQ32/A030

ADQ32-A, --S Analog-to-Digital Converter
Ordering Information
Module (A030) for BA23,

ADQ32-A

BA123, and H9642-J
Moedule (A030-PA) for
BA200-series

ADQ32-5A tfactory installed)
ADQ32-SF (field upgrade)

Cabinet kit (BA23)

CK-ADQ32-KA

Cabinet kit (BA123)

CK-ADQ32-KB

Cabinet kit (BA23 expansion box)

CK-ADQ32-KF

UDIP parts

See Table 2 of this section.

Operating System Support
VMS
MicroVMS

Version 5.0 and later. using VAXlab
Software Library
Version 4.5 and later, using
VAXlab Software Library

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXnp

Version 2.10 (release 120) and later
Version 2.1 (release 134): CZADQAQ,
CZADRAD, CZADSAQ, CXADQAO.

Power-up self-test LEDs

See module documentation.

Microsystems Options

ADQ32/A030

Documentation
ADQ32 A/ Converter Module User's Guide
ADQ32 Universal Data Interface Panel
Reference Card

EK-153AA-UG
EK-UDIPA-RC

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

ADQ32-A

A030

0.0

25.0

0.5

ADQ32-5

A030-PA

0.0

25.0

0.5

The ADQ32 is an analog-to-digital converter with direct memory access
(DMA). The ADQ32--A is shown in Figure 1.
The ADQ32 is a quad-height module with full 22-bit addressing, and offers
the following features:

200 kHz throughput

DMA data transfer

¢«

Four interrupt levels

Thirty-two single-ended or 16 differential input channels

Random channel sampling

On-board clock with variety of clocking modes

Selectable clock source (initial or external)

Microsystems Options

ADQ32/A030

Figure 1:

ADQ32-A Module Layout (A030)

—

f_‘“r\

we
w5
WAaTIW2

waltliw1
ANALOG LOGIC

COVER
R

SWITCHPACKS

55 o0

OO0

[
MLO-00102)

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the iniernal parts of a computer system.

Use DIP switchpacks 0 and 1 to set the CSR address and interrupt vector
for the ADQ32. The CSR address and interrupt vectors float.

Microsystems Options

ADQ32/A030
On switchpack 1, use switch 08 to set extended block mode. Extended
block mode increases DMA data transfer efficiency. It cannot be used in
MicroPDP-11 systems. Setting switch 08 to the ON position selects the
extended block mode. Use switches 09 and 10, also in switchpack 1, to
configure the interrupt priority level. The following tables list the factory
configuration for the CSR address and interrupt vector:
ADQ32 CSR Address:

17761140

(factory position)

Switchpack 0

Address Bits:
Switches:

Al2
1

All Al0 A9
2
3
4

A8
5

A7
6

17761140

17761200

)

A6
7

A5
8

A4
9

C8R Address:

1 = switch on,
*

Switch

ADQ32

0 = switch off.

not

used.

Interrupt Vector:

300

(factory position)

Switchpack 1

Vector Bits:

V7?7

Veé

Switches:

300

310

Vector Address:

switch on,

switch

off.

The interrupt priority levels for the ADQ32 are as follows:
Switch 1
Priority
Level

Microsystems Options

10*

ADQ32/A030

ADQ32 Analog Input Range
The ADQ32 has two selections for analog input ranges. Unipolar signals in
the range of 0 to 10 volts can be converted. Bipolar signals in the range of
-10 to +10 volts can also be converted. Although the bipolar range setting
includes the range covered for unipolar signals, if your signal is unipolar,
you will obtain greater resolution using the unipolar setting. Jumpers on
the board allow you to select the range.
Two’s complement data coding is used for the bipolar input range. When
you select the unipolar input range, straight binary coding is used.
Jumpers W1 through W8 on the board control the selection of the analog
range. To select the bipolar input range, install jumpers W1, W3, W5,
and W7. Install jumpers S2, W4, W6, and W8 to select the unipolar input
range. In the bipolar setting, all of the jumpers are installed on the lower
portion (closer to the bus fingers) of the jumper fields. These settings are
summarized in Table 1.

Table 1:

ADQ32 Analog Input Range Jumper Selection

Jumpers

Bipolar

Unipolar

W1, W3, W5, W7

Out

W2, W4, W6, W8

QOut

The factory configuration is for bipolar analog input.

ADQ32 Q/CD Jumpers
Because the ADQ32 is a quad-height board, in some situations the only
slots available for installation are Q/CD slots. Q/CD slots, also called Qover-CD slots, are slots where the upper backplane slots are Q-bus slots but
the bottom slots are C/D slots, which are intended for devices that are not
Q-bus devices, such as system memory. When the ADQ32 is installed in a
Q/CD backplane slot, jumpers R58 and R59 should be removed. Figure 1,
earlier in this section, shows the location of jumpers R58 and R59.
When the ADQ32 is factory installed in a system, the factory removes
Jumpers R58 and RS9, if necessary.

Microsystems Options

ADQ32/A030
To facilitate connections to the ADQ32, you can use a universal data
interface panel (UDIP). This panel provides easily removable input strips
for making bare lead connections. The panel, like other universal data
interface panels, is installed in a UDIP-BA mounting box. The mounting
box/panel assembly can then be installed in any standard media mounting
slot normally used for TK50, RX50, or RD50-series media devices. The
mounting box can also be mounted in a tabletop (UDIP-TA) expansion box
for use as an external connection box.

Table 2 lists the UDIP components required for each type of configuration.

Table 2:

ADQ32 UDIP Components

Module

Enclosure

ADQ32-S
ADQ32-A

BA200 Series

UDIP-DD

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

None

BA123

UDIP-DC

UDIP-BA

None

BA123 with

UDIP-DD

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-ADQ32-KB

UDIP-DD

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-ADQ32-KA

ADQ32-A

media slot

Front

Panel

Mounting

Box

Tabletop

Box

Other

ftems

tabletop

ADQ32-A

BA23 with

tabletop

Microsystems Options

ADV11/A1008

ADV11-D, -S Analog-to-Digital Converter
Ordering Information
Module (A1008) for BA23,
BA123, and HY642-J
Module (A1008-PA) for
BA200-series

ADVI1-D

ADV11-8A (factory installed)
ADV11-8F (field upgrade)

Cabinet kit (BA23)

CK-~ADV1D-KA

Cabinet kit (BA123)

CK-ADV1D-KC

UDIP parts

See Table 2 of this section.

Operating System Support
MicroVMS

Version 4.2 and later, using VAXlab

RSX-11M

Software Library
Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 3.0 and later

VMS

Version 5.0 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

Version 1.08 (release 108) and later
Version 2.1 (release 134) and later:
VADACO0.BIC, XADCB0.0OBJ.

Power-up self-test LEDs

See module documentation

Microsystems Options

ADV11/A1008

Documentation
Q-Bus DMA Analog System User's Guide

EK-AVIID-UG

Universal Data Interface Panel Reference Card

EK-UDIPD-RC

DC Power and Bus l.oads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

Abvil-D
ADV11-8A

A1008
A1008-PA

3.2
32

00
0.0

16.0
16.0

1.0
2.3

1.0
05

The ADV11-D, -S is an analog-to-digital converter with direct memory
access { DMA). The ADV11-D is shown in Figure 1.
The ADV11 15 a dual-height module with full 22-bit addressing, and offers
the following features:

Four interrupt levels

Sixteen single-ended or eight differential input channels

Selectable clock source (initial or external)

Programmed I/O or DMA operating modes (with maximum throughput
of 50 kHz)

Microsystems Options

ADV11/A1008

ADV11-D Module Layout (A10N8)

F-9

|1 850DOO000T

Figure 1:

MLO-001022

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Use jumpers W7 through W22 to set the CSR address and interrupt vector
for the ADV11. The CSR address is fixed for the first ADV11. All interrupt

vectors float. The following tables list the factory configuration for the CSR
address and interrupt vector:
ADV11-D

CSR Address:

Jumpers

W13

through

17776410

(factory

position)

W22

Address Bits:

2al2

All

Al0

Jumpers

Wil

Wld

W15

W16

W17

W18

W19

W20

W21

w22

17776410

CSR Address:

installed,

removed

Microsystems Options

ADV11/A1008
ADV11-D Interrupt Vector:
Jumpers W7 through W12

320

(factory position)

Vector Bits:

Jumpezrs:

Wi2 W1l W10

0
0

i
0

0
0

Vé

Vector Addresas:

320
300
1 = installed,

b
1

1
1

0 = removed

The interrupt priority levels for the ADV11 are as follows:
Priority

w15

W16

)

Out

In factory)

Out

Level

ADV11-D, -S User-Selectable Jumper Features
The ADV11-D, -S§ has a variety of user-selectable features, which
are controlled by jumpers.
These features set parameters for specific
applications. The customer should select the parameters.
Table 1 lists the user-selectable jumper features and the factory
configuration.
To change any of these features, refer to the module
documentation.

Table 1:

ADV11-D, -S User Selectable Features

Feature

Factory

Configuration

Jumpers

Continuous Mode DMA

Enabled

DMA Wrap Mode

Enabled

Input range

+/~ 10 Volts

W27, W28, W30

Input mode

Single ended

W24, W25, W26, W34

Output coding

Twao's complement

W39, W40

Sign Extension

Enabled

W37, W38

4 Microsystems Options

ADV11/A1008

To facilitate connections to the ADV11-D, -S, you can use a universal
data interface panel (UDIP). This panel provides BNC cable connectors
and push-tab barrier strips for making cabling connections. The panel, like
other universal data interface panels, is installed in a UDIP-BA mounting
box. Up to three panels can be installed in a mounting box. The mounting
box/panel assembly can then be installed in any standard media mounting
slot normally used for TK50, RX50, or RD50-series media devices. The
mounting box can also be mounted in a tabletop (UDIP-TA) expansion box
for use as an external connection box.
Table 2 lists the EDIP components required for each type of configuration.

Table 2:

ADV11-D, -S UDIP Components

Module

Enclosure

Front
Panel

Mounting
Box

Tabletop
Box

Other
Items

ADV11-8

BA200 Series

UDIP-AB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

None

BA123

UDIP-AA

UDIP-BA

None

UDIP-AB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-ADV1ID-KC

UDIP-AB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-ADV1ID-KA

ADV11-D

media slot
ADV11-D

BA123 with
tabletop

ADVI11-D

BA23 with
tabletop

Microsystems Options

AXV11/A0026

AXV11-C, -S Analog /O Module
Ordering Information
AXV11-D

Maoadule (A0026) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642J
Module (A0026-PA) for
BA200-series

AXV11-SA (factory installed)
AXV11-SF (field upgrade)

Cabinet kit (BA23)

CK-AXV1C-KA

Cabinet kit (BA123)

CK-AXVI1C-KC

UDIP parts

See Table 2 of this section.

Operating System Support
VMS

Version 5.0 and later, using VAXlab
Software Labrary
Version 4 4 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

MicroVMS
VAXELN

Version 3.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP V2.1

Version 1.10 (release 110; and later
CVAXA, VAXABO.BIC

Power-up self-test LEDs

See module documentation.

Documentation
AXV1I1-C/KWV]11-C User's Guide
Universal Data Interface Panel Reference Card

EK-AXVAB-UG
EK-UDIPD-RC

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current
(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

Watts

ADX11-D
ADX11-8

A0026
A0026-PA

2.0
20

10.0

0.3

10.0

0.3

1.2

Insert

NOTE: For full use of diagnostic CVAXA, an analog test fixture (30-18692)
ts required.

Microsystems Options

AXV11/A0026

The AXV11 is an analog input/output module. The AXV11~C module layout
is shown in Figure 1.
For analog input (A/D conversion), the module contains 16 single-ended or 8
differential input, either unipolar or bipolar. Programmable gain for 1, 2, 4,
or 8 can be applied to the input signal. For analog output {D/A conversion),

the module provides two 12-bit DACs with unipolar or bipolar output.

Figure 1:

AXV11-C Module Layout (A0026)
—

GROUND
{] | FULLSCALE PG ZERD 2010
RTCIN

= jumBER

JuwpeR

gc DC o

A/DCONVERTER MODULE

ONVERTER

R W

JUMPER

GROUP V |+~

FS RANGE ADJ A~ é%%FIJEPRB
ADJ A

;

GROUP D

;o GROUP E

ZEROOFFSET |

T2 jUMPER

Eflfifij JUMPER

Cal

S~ GROUP P

JUMPER

jugg

JUMPER

FS RANGE ADJ B

GROUPF

2ERO OFFSET |
ADJ B

NOTE

THE JUMPERS SHOWN ARE THE
FACTORY CONFIGURATION

&
ShireR

GROUP
A|
MLO- 001023

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with tke internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

AXV11/A0026

Use jumpers A3 through A12 to set the CSR address and jumpers V3
through V8 to set the interrupt vector for the AXV1l. The CSR address
is fixed for the first AXV1l, and floats for secondary units. The first
interrupt vector address is fixed (at 140g; the factory configuration is for
400g.) Vectors for all secondary uniws float. The following tables list the
factory configuration for the CSR address and interrupt vector:
AXV11-C,

-8 CSR Address:

Address Bits:
Jumpers:
CSR Address:

17770400

= insgstelled.

AXV11-C,

17770400

(factory position)

Al2
Al2

All Al0 A9
All A10 A9

A8
AB

A7
A7

A6
A6

A5
A5

A4
A4

A3
A3

0 = removed

-5 Interrupt Vector:

400

(factory position)

Vector Bita:

V71

Veé

Vv3

Jumpers:

0
1

400

300

Vector Address:

140

installed,

0 =

removed

AXV11-C, -S User Selectable Jumper Features
The AXVI11-C, -S has a variety of user-selectable features, which
are controlled by jumpers.
These features set parameters for specific
applications. The customer should select the features.

Microsystems Options

AXV11/A0026
Table 1 lists
configuration.

documentation.

Table 1:

the user-selectable jumper features and the factory
To change any of these features, refer to the module

AXV11-C, -S User-Selectable Features
Factory

Feature
DAC A data notation

DAC B data notation
DAC A output range

Configuration

Jumpers

Offset binary
Offset binary

3A and 5A
1B and 5B

+/~ 10 volts

D1, D3
D1, D3

DAC R output range

+/- 10 volts

ADC data notation

Offset binary

1D, 4D, 5D, 6D, 5E, 6E

Analog input mode

Single ended

P1, P2, P&, P9

Ex:ternal trigger source

External trigger

F1, F2

To facilitate connections to the AXV11-C or AXVI11-S, you can use a
universal data interface panel (UDIP). This panel provides BNC cable
connectors and push-tab barrier strips for making cabling connections. The
panel, like other universal data interface panels, is installed in a UDIPBA mounting box. Up to three panels can be instalied in a mounting box.
The mounting box/pane assembly can then be installed in any standard
media mounting slot normally used for TK50, RX50, or RD50-series media
devices. The mounting box can also be mounted in a tabletop (UDIP-TA)
expansion box for use as an external connection box.
Table 2 lists the UDIP components required for each type of configuration.

Table2:

AXV11-C, -S UDIP Components

Module

Enclosure

Front
Panel

Mounting
Box

Tabletop
Box

Other
Items

AXV11-S

BA200 Senes

UDIP-AY

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

None

AXV11-C

BA123

UDIP-AX

UDIP-BA

None

BA123 with

IDIP-AY

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-AXVIC-KC

UDIP-AY

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-AXV1C-KA

AXV11i-C

media slot
tabletop

AXV11-C

BA23 with
tabletop

Microsystems Options

CXA16/M3118-YA
CXB16/M3118-YB

CXA16/CXB16 16-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
The CXA16/CXB16 is an option for BA200-series enclcsures only.
Ordering Information
Module (M3118-YA"

Moduie (M3118-YB)

CXAl6-AA (factory installed)
CXA16-AF (field upgrade)
CXB16-AA ifactory installed)
CXB16-AF (field upgrade)

25-pin passive adapter

H8571-A

9-pin passive adapter

H8571-R

Active adapter

H3105

Loopback connectors (external)

12-25146-01 (H3101)
12-25083-01 (H3103)

Operating System Support
Micro/RSX
RSX--11M

Version 4.0 and later
Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4 0 and later

ULTRIX-32

Version 2.2

VMS

Version 4.6a and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 2.10 (release 120) and later

Microsystems Options

CXA16/M3118-YA
CXB16/M3118-YB
Documentation
EK-CAB16-TM
EK-~-CAB16-UG

CXA16/CXRB16 Technical Manual
CXA16/CXB16 User's Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5YV

Watts

CXA16-M
CXB16-M

M3118-YA
M3118-YB

16
20

10.4
10.0

3.0
3.0

0.5
0.5

Insert

The CXA16/CXB16 asynchronous multiplexer performs data concentration,

terminal interfacing, and cluster controlling. The CXA16/CXB16 is shown

in Figure 1.

The CXA16/CXB16 is a quad-height module (Figure 1) that provides 16 fullduplex, asynchronous data-only channels. The CXA16/CXB16 is compatible
with RS423-A and DECA423 interface standards. In addition, the CXB16 is
compatible with the RS422-A interface standard.

Microsystems Options

CXA16/M3118~YA
CXB16/M3118-YB
Figure 1:

CXA16/CXB16 Module (M3118-YA/-YB)

CXA16

M3118
-YA

ML0-2175.-87

Microsystems Options

CXA16/M3118-YA
CXB16/M3118-YB
All lines have transient surge suppressors for protection against electrical
overstress (EOS) and electrostatic discharge (ESD). You can program each
channel separately for split transmit and receive speeds. There are 16
available baud rates:
Available Baud Rates
50

1800

2000

110

2400

134.5

4800

150

7200

300

9600

600

19,200

1200

38.400

The CXA16/CXB16 provides two throughput rates, based on the character
format:

122 880 characters per second, at seven bits per character, with one
start bit, one parity bit, and one stop bit

175,542 characters per second, at five bits per character, with one start
bit, no parity bit, and one stop bit

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.
Set the CSR address and interrupt vector for the CXA16/CXB16 by using
DIP switches on the module (Figure 2). The CXA16/CXB16 uses a floating
CSR address and interrupt vector.

Microsystems Options

CXA16/M3118-YA
CXB16/M3118~-YB
Figure 2:

CXA16/CXB16 Module Layout

L\
E34
-

bHU

CLOSED=1=0N

OPEN=0=0F F

€2

CLOSED

b ¥

MANE

OPEN

MLO- 2203 -87

Microsystems Options

CXA16/M3118-YA
CXB16/M3118-YB
The CXA16/CXB16 factory positions are as follows:
CXAl6/CXB16 CSR Addresa:
Switchpack E34

17760440

(factory position)

Address Bits:

Al2

All Al0 A9

Ré

E34 Switches:

CSR Address

17760440
1

= closed,

0 = open

CXA16/CXBl6 Interrupt Vector:

300

(factory position)

Vector Bits:

veé

E26 Switches:

Vactor

Addrezss
1

300:

= c¢losed,

0 = open

Switch E34-1 selects DHV11 or DHU11 programming mode. Select the
mode appropriate to the device driver in the system. Generally, DHU11
mode gives better performance because it does not require as much CPU
time. To select DHU11 mode, set switch E34~1 to 1 (closed).
For correct operation, make sure switch E27-1 is closed (1) and switch
E27-2 is open (0). Closing switch E27-1 selects the onboard 14.7458-MHz
oscillator. Closing switch E27-2 selects the external loopback indicator for
the self-test, in both DHU and DHV modes.
Both the CXA16-AA and -AF, and CXB16-AA and -AF include a 7024314-01 cabinet kit with the following parts:

Two 7.6 m (25 ft) BC16D-25 cables
Two H3104 cable concentrators

Cable extender (null modem cable with modified modular jacks)
Both the H8571-A and H8571-B convert a D-connector to a modiied
modular jack. This conversion is required for connecting terminals and
printers to office cables terminated with modified modular plugs. The
H3105 converts EIA-232-D signals to DEC423 signals.

Microsystems Options

CXY08/M3119-YA

CXY08 8-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
The CXY08 module is an option for BA200-series enclosures only.
Ordering Information
Module (M3119-YA)

Loopback connectors (external)

CXY08-AA (factory installed)
CXY08-AF (field upgrade)
H3046
H3197 (12-15336-07)

Operating System Support
Micro/RSX

RSX-11M

Version 4.0 and later
Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

ULTRIX- 32

Version 2.2

VMS

Version 4.6.a and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 2.10 (release 120) and later

Microsystems Options

CXY08/M3119-YA

Documentation
EK-CXY08-TM

CXY08 Technical Manual

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

CXY08-M

M3119-YA

1.8

0.3

12,6

0.5

NOTE: Both the CXY08-AA and -AF include a 70-24314-01 external cable.
The CXY08 asynchronous multiplexer performs data concentration, realtime processing, and interactive terminal handling. The CXY08 is a quadheight module with a BA200-series handle (Figure 1). The CXYO08 option
also includes two cable assemblies. The module provides eight full-duplex
serial data channels. Each cable assembly has a 4-channel distributor.

All eight channels allow autoanswer dial-up operation over the publicswitched telephone network. You can use AT&T 103, 113, and 212 modems,
or the equivalent.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.
Select the CSR address and interrupt vector for the CXY08 by using DIP
switches on the module (Figure 2). The CXY08 uses a floating CSR address
and interrupt vector.

Microsystems Options

CXY08/M3119-YA

CXY08 Module (M3119-~YA)

y G
)

| i

CXY08

M3119

e ot

Figure 1:

MLO 2208 87

Microsystems Options

CXY08/M3119-YA
Figure 2:

CXYO08 Module Layout

DHU

OPEN=0=0FF

MANF

OPEN

TEST

MLO-2205-87

Microsystems Options

CXY08/M3119-YA

The CXY08 factory CSR address switch positions are as follows:

CSR Address Bits
NOTE: (1 = closed, 0 = open)
Al2
All
Al0
AP
A8

K38 Switches
2

CSR Address 17760440:
0

CYXO08 Interrupt Vector: 300 (factory position)

Vector Address Bits
1 = CLOSED, 0 = OPEN:
Vector bits

E28 Switches

Vector Address 300:

]

Switch E36-1 selects DHV11 or DHU11 programming mode. Select the
mode appropriate to the device driver in the system. Generally, DHU11
mode gives better performance because it does not require as much CPU
time. To select DHU11 mode, set switch 361 to O (open). This selects the
DHU11 programming mode, while setting switch 36-1 to 1 (closed), selects
DHV11 programming mode.

Switch E28~1 should be =~* *~ 1 (closed) and switch E28-2 should be set to
0 (open); these switches are used during manufacturing.

Microsystems Options

5§

DEFQA/M7534

DEFQA FDDicontroller to Q~-bus Adapter
The DEFQA is an adapter that allows the transmission of data from Q-bus-

based MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3500, 3600, 3800, 3900 and BA4xx-based VAX 4000
systems to the FDDI network.
The DEFQA is available as either a single attachment station (SAS) or a dual
attachment station (DAS) to the network. Figure 1 shows a DAS DEFQA.

Ordering information

SAS DEFQA/M7534-AS for BA2xx/4xxbased systems (factory installed)
SAS DEFQA/M7534—AS for BA2xx/4xx-

DEFQA-SA

DEFQA-SF

based systems (field installed)
DAS DEFQA/M7534-AD for BA2xx/4xx-

DEFQA-DA

based systems (factory installed)
DAS DEFQA/M7534-AD for BA2xx/4xx-

DEFQA-DF

based systems (field installed)
Performance

Maximum throughput (constrained by
Q-bus bandwidth)

15 megabits/second

Physical Specifications

Single quad-height module

8 %in x 10 % in

Power Requiremants

SAS option

+5 Vde, 5.12 A (maximum)
+12 Vdc, 0.01 A (typical)

DAS option

+5 Vde, 5.6 A (maximum)
+12 Vdc, 0.01 A (typical)

DEFQA/M7534

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.5-2 with DEC LAN
Device Driver Kit or Version 6.1

and later!
DEC LAN Device Driver Kit (TK50) for

QA-OPAAA-HS

OpenVMS VAX Version 5.5-2
DEC LAN Device Driver Kit (magtape) for

QA-OPAAA-HM

OpenVMS VAX Version 5.5-2
Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-Test Diagnostic (POST)

See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Version 138 and later

Related Documentation

DEC FDDIcontroller/Q-bus Installation

EK-DEFQA-IN

"The kit is required only with Version 5.5-2 of the OpenVMS operating system.

Jumper and Switches
A pair of jumper pins reside on the DEFQA. Installing a jumper enables the
FLASH memory to be updated. Usually, the jumper is removed.

A switchpack on the DEFQA allows you to set the CSR address. Switches 1
through 7 respectively represent Q-bus address bits 6 through 12, the variable
part of the address (Example 1). Figure 1 shows the location of the switches.
Example 1

CSR Address

Address

Always 177

0
-

9
emen

Always 00

Variable value set

switches

The following describes the switch settings for CSR address 1776 1400:
CSR Address

Binary Equivalent

111

110

001

100

000

Switch Settings

—

001

160

—

Switches

—

- 7

664

321

—

Switch Settings:

1 = On = Down = Open

0 = Off = Up = Closed

Figure 1 DEFQA Module (DAS Option)

@
VA
)\

Optical Bypass —;
Connector

FRU LED & S|

MIC A
PHY1 LED \

PHY2 LED

l“

r—f >~

DEFQA/M7534

Address

Switches

NOTE: The optical bypass connector, PHY2 LED,
and MIC B reside only on a DAS DEFQA.

MLO-010871

DEFQA/M7534

indicators

Bicolor (red/green) LEDs on the DEFQA indicate its status. The SAS option has

a field replaceable unit LED (FRU LED) and a physical layer FDDI connection
state LED (PHY LED). The DAS option has an FRU LED and two PHY LEDs,
The following table describes the LED indications and Figure 1 shows the LED
locations on the DEFQA.
When the FRU LEDis ...

it indicates . ..

end you shouid . ..

Solid red for < 6 seconds

the DEFQA is in the power-up

wait for the testing to complete.

state

Solid red for » 6 seconds

the DEFQA has failed its self-test

see the device documentation.

Blinking red

the DEFQA has detected a failure

see the devicc documentation.

Ooft

no power

power up the system box or
expander.

Solid green

the DEFQA has successfully passed

operate the DEFQA.

its self-test

Blinking green

the DEFQA has passed its self-test,

wait for the driver installation

and is waiting for the driver to be

to complete.

installed

When the PHY LEDs ...

it indicates . ..

and you shouid . . .

Solid red

the DEFQA has detected a failure

verify the operation of the

with the port, or the link confidence

DEFQA by runaing the self-test

test (LCT) failed

diagnostic.

Blinking red

the cables are installed incorrectly

verify the cable connections.

off

one of the following:
-~ no power

power up the system box or
expander.

Solid green

— the port is not available

wait for the port.

- software configuring is incomplete

wait for the completion.

the DEFQA is working correctly

do nothing.

and is in standby mode

Blinking green

one of the following:

~ the port is not being used

do nothing.

- the connection is in progress

wait for the connection.

— the link is available, but cannot

verify the cable connections.

make a connection

DELQA/M7516

DELQA Ethernet Interface
Ordé—ring Information
Module (M7516) for BA23,

DELQA-M

BA123, and H9642-)

Module (M7516-PA)

DELQA cabinet kit
30-cm (12-in) cable/filter

DELQA-SA factory installed)
DELQA-SF (field upgrade)
BA2

BA123

H9642-J

CK-DELQA-YB

CK-DELQA-YA

CK-DELQA-YF

70-21202-01

70-21202-1K

70-21202-03

connector

53-cm (21-in) cable/filter
connector

90-cm (36-1n) cable/filter
connector

Loopback connectors

70-21489-01 (external)

12-22196-02 (external)

Operating System Support
ULTRIX-32
VMS

Version 2.2 or later
Version 4.6.a and later

Diagtiostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 2 10 trelease 120) and later

Xxnp

Version 2.1 trelease 1341

XQNAF0 OBJ
Power-up sell-tes: LEDs

Three LEDs

Microsystems Options

DELQA/M7516

Documentation

EK-DELQA-UG

DELQA User's Manual

EK-DELQA-IN

DELQA Installation Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DELQA-M
DELQA-S

M7516
M7516-PA

2.5
25

0.5
0.5

19.5
19.5

2.2
2.2

0.5
05

A
-

The DELQA
ovides a high-speed synchronous connection between a
Q-bus system and a local area network (LLAN) based on the Ethernet
communications system. Ethernet lets computers exchange data within a
moderate distance (2.8 km; 1.74 mi). The DELQA has all the functions
of the DEQNA, plus maintenance operation protocol (MOP) functions.

Figure 1 shows the DELQA-S module (M7516-PA).

Microsystems Options

DELQA/M7516

Figure 1:

DELQA-S Module Layout (M7516-PA)

000

S | I
R

{

—
1

— (L=
1

MLO-001024

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
sérap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when vou

work with the internal parts ofa computer system.

You configure the DELQA by setting five switches, shown in Figure 1. The
switches are set 1n the closed (1) position at the factory.
The DELQA
supports DEQNA mode and DELQA mode, which yvou select with S3. Note

that S4 is an option switch, whose function depends upon the position of
The sanity timer enabled by S4 monitors the host for hardware or software
malfunctions. Enable the sanity timer for specific applications only.

CAUTION: If vou enable the sanity timer in the DEQNA mode and downline load software or diagnostics, the sanity timer may time out before the
load 1s complete.

Microsystems Options

DELQA/M7516
The DELQA interrupt vector of 120 is written into a read/write register by
software. If a second DELQA is used, its interrupt vector floats.
Table 1 lists the functions of the DELQA switches.
differences between DEQNA mode and DELQA mode.

Table 1:

DELQA Switches

Switech

Function

81
S

Open = CSR address 17774460 (for second DELQA)
Closed = CSR address 17774440 (factory)

Reserved

Open = DEQNA mode selected (lock mode)

Closed = DELQA maode selected tnormal mode?

5S4

Open. and 83 open = sanity timer ON

Closed. and S3 open = sanity timer OFF

Open, and 83 closed = remote boot ON

Closed, and 53 closed = remote boot OFF (factory)

Reserved

Table 2:

D_ELGA Modes

Table 2 lists the

Support

DEQNA Mode

DELQA Mode

All DEQNA functions

Yes

MOP functions

Yes

Self-test support

Yes

Boot/diagnostic code support

Yes

Sanity timer

Yes

Microsystems Options

DELQA/M7516

Power-Up Self-Test
The DELQA power-up self-test runs only when the module 1s switched to
DELQA normal mode. It is initiated at system power-up, hardware reset,
network boot, or when you issue the following boot command:
>>>

XQAO

Three LEDs on the DELQA module display the test results (Table 3). To
reset the LEDs, shut down the system, then power it up again.

Table 3:

DELQA LED Seli-Test Resuits
LED

Definition

Ooff

off

Oftf

DELQA citizenship (CQ; test passed.

Off

External loopback test failed.

Off

DELQA internal error,

Cannot upload the BD ROM contents, or the first setup

packet prefill faiied

NOTE: If you replace the DELQA, you must: (1) install the original station
address PROM from the old DELQA, or (2) change the network data base
at the host system to reflect the new station address.

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504

DEQNA Ethernet Interface
Ordering Information
Module (M7504) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642—J
Module (M7504-PA) for
BA200-series

DEQNA-SA (factory installed)
DEQNA-SF (field upgrade)

Fuse, 1.5 A slow blow

90-07213-00

DEQNA-M

BA23

DEQNA cabinet kit
30-cm (12-in) cable/filter

BA123

H9642-J

CK-DEQNA-KB

CK-DEQNA-KA

CK-DEQNA-KF

70-21202-01

70-21202-1K

70-21202-03

connector

53-cm (21-in) cable/filter
connector

90-cm (36-in) cable/filter
connector

Loopback connectors

70-21489-01 texternal)

12-22196--02 (external)

Operating System Support
DSM-11

MicroVMS

Version 3.3 and later
Version 4.1m or later

RT-11

Version 5.4D and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 2.0 or later

VAXELN

Version 1.1 or later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

All versions and releases
Version 2.1 (release 1341

XPNAF0.OBJ
Power-up self-test

Three LLEDs

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504

Documentation

EK-DEQNA-UG

DEQNA Ethernet User's Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DEQNA-M
DEQNA-S

M7504
M7504-PA

3.5
35

0.5
0.5

23.5
23.5

2.8
2.2

05
0.5

A
-

The DEQNA is a dual-height module that connects a Q22-bus system to a
local area network (LAN) based on the Ethernet communications system.
Ethernet lets computers exchange data within a moderate distance (2.8
km: 1.74 mi). The DEQNA can transmit data at a rate of 1.2 Mbytes/sec
through coaxial cable. For high Ethernet traffic, you can install a second
DEQNA.

There are two versions of the DEQNA module:
For the BA23, BA123, and H9642
For BA200-series

Microsystems Options

DEQNA-M (Figure 1)
DEQNA-SA (Figures 2 and 3)

DEQNA/M7504

Figure 1:

DEQNA-M Module Layout (M7504)

J
N

jwi

TW2

}

MLO- 001025

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504
Figure 2:

DEQNA-SA Module Layout (M7504-PA)

]

l
MLO-001028

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504

DEQNA-SA Handle

Figure 3:

DEQNA

~N —h

M7504

-PA

LEDs

MLO-001146

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504
You configure the DEQNA by using three jumpers, W1 through W3. Jumper
W1 determines the CSR address. The DEQNA CSR addresses are factory
positioned as follows:
DEQNA Module No.

CSR Address

17774440

17774460

If you install two DEQNAs, move jumper W1 of the second DEQNA to the
left (farthest from W3) and center pins (Figure 1 or 2).
The interrupt vector is written into a read/write register by softwure. The

interrupt vectors are as follows:
DEQNA Module No.

Interrupt Vector

120

Floating

Jumper W2 is normally removed, in order to provide fair access to all DMA
devices using the Q22-bus. When removed, W2 makes the DEQNA wait 5
nsec before requesting the bus again.
Jumper W3 is normally installed, in order to disable a sanity timer at
initialization. Figure 4 shows the internal cabling for the DEQNA-M.

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504

Figure 4:

DEQNA-M Internal Cabling

MLO-00 1027

DEQNA Power-Up Self-Test
The DEQNA self-test is run by the CPU, not by the DEQNA’s onboard
microcomputer chip. This feature improves the accuracy of a successful
test, because the test checks the Q22-bus interface. However, it reduces
the accuracy of an unsuccessful test, because a CPU or Q22-bus problem
can also cause the failure. The accuracy of a successful test is also improved
because the test performs an exteinal loopback test through the Ethernet
transceiver or 2 loopback connector.

Microsystems Options

DEQNA/M7504
Figure 5 shows the DEQNA LEDs. Table 1 describes the LED error codes
for a system that uses the DEQNA as a boot device. If the system does not
use the DEQNA as a boot device, all LEDs remain on.
Figure 5:

DEQNA Module LEDs

LEDs

Table 1:

MLD 001028

DEQNA LED Error Codes

LEDs

Test and Possible FRU Failures

DEQNA station address PROM test
1. DEQNA module

2. KA630 module

3. Q22-bus device
4. Backplane

Off

DEQNA internal loopback test
1. DEQNA module

Off

DEQNA external loopback test

{Requires loopback connector or working transceiver.)

1. DEQNA module

2. Cabling {shorted, opened, or not connected)
3. Fuse in CPU /O insert

Off

DEQNA passed all power-up tests.

Microsystems Options

DEQRA Token Ring Controller
The DEQRA Token Ring Controller and its software, TRDRV/VMS, enables
Q-bus VAX systems to connect to either a 4- or 16-Mbits/second Token Ring
network, and act as full function DECnet Phase IV nodes and PATHWORKS
for VMS servers.

Token Ring
The Token Ring Controller (M7533-AB) is a quad height Q-bus module that
is used to communicate between the Q-bus and an IBM-compatible Token
Ring (IEEE). This controller has a Token Ring port recessed into the module
handle.
Some of the features include a 32-bit processor, random-access memory,
programmable read-only memory, Token Ring interface arcuitry, and host
interface circuitry. Self-test diagnostics are provided on the module. A
serial EIA-232 console port is provided for connection to a console device.
It is used with BA200-series and BA400-series enclosures.
Ordering Information

DEQRA-CA

DEQRA module, documentation, and license

BC29E-15 (optional)

letter
External console ribbon cable, 15-feet.
microcode DEBUG

BC26P-15 (optional)

Adapter cable used to connect Token Ring.

OL~-GVJAP-AA

Software license

Used for

Functional Information
Supported protocols

IBM-compatible Token Ring (IEEE 802.5)

Operating system supported

VMS 6.4-3
DECTRN Driver VMS 1.0

Performance
Data transfer rate

4-Mbits and 16-Mbits

DEQRA/M7533

Diagnostic Support
Diagnoatic support

Power-up self test
MDM (Version 136)

Installation Verification Procedure
DEQRA specific from host

Configuration Information

M7533-AB

Base module

Form factor

Quad height

Related Documentation

EK-DEQRA-IN

DEC TRNcontroller 100 Hardware Installation and

EK-DEQRA-TM

DEC TRNcontroller 100 Hardware Description and

AA-PH7NA-TE

DEC Token Ring Netwark Device Driver for VMS

Debugging

Operation

Installation

AA-PH7PA-TE

DEC Token Ring Network Device Driver for VMS Use and

Programming

+5V

+12V

DEQRA

M7533-AR

5.0

Bus Loads
(Maximum)

Watts

5.0

2.0

’-l

Module

Option

Power

Current
(Amps)

DC Power and Bus Loads

DEQRA/M7533

Switches
The following address switches are for the Q-bus.
Push button switch NMI

When pressed, NMI switch puts the MC68020 processor on the module into
ODT68 (Debugging Mode). Normally unused.

Push button switch RST
When pressed the RST switch will reset the MC68020 processor and run
onboard power-up diagnostics. Not used during normal operation.

NOTE: The memory address jumper is shipped with jumper in from the

factory.
Shard Memory Base Address

The following table lists the switch numbers for the base address range.
Table 1:

Shared Memory Base Address Switch Numbers
Address Bits
Switch Numbers

Address Range

00000000-01777777

02000000-03777777

04000000-06777777

06000000-07777777

10000000-11777777

12000000-13777777

14000000-15777777

16000000-177777T77

DEQRA/M7533
interrupt Level

The interrupt request (IRQ) is level 4 (BR4).
Control Status Register (CSR)

The following table lists the CSR bits and a functional description of each
of the bits.

Table 2:

Control Status Register (CSR) Blts

Bits

Description

(15--09)

Output Port: Bits are read only by the CPU host and user definable.

Unused

Hosat Nop-maskable Interrupt (NMI) request:
When the host sets this bit to 1, it puts the 68020 processor on the module
into ODTE8 debugging.

Interrupt Enable (IE): When the host sets this bit to 1, the Q-bus IRQ4

Host Reset Request (HRR): When the host sets this to 1, it causes the
MC68020 processcr on the module to reset and run the onboard power-up
diagnostics.

04-00

Input Port: These bits are read/writeable by the host. They are user de-

interrupt is enabled.

finable.

Control Status Reglster (CSK) Switch Settings
The following table lists the CSR switch settings.

DEQRA/M7533

Table 3:

CSR Switch Settings
CSR Switches! 2

Base

Q-bus

Address’

Address

S¢

S10

S11

S12

2000 0000

760000

2000 0040

760002

2060 0800

760004

2000 00C0

760006

]

2000 0100

760010

2000 0140

760012

2000 0180

760014

2000 01C0

760016

2000 0200

760020

)

2000 0F40

767772

2000 0F80

767774

2000 OFCO

767776

1Switch ON = 1, Switch OFF = 0
2Switch 1 is not used
8Default address is 761344

DEQRA/M7533

Table 4:

Module interface Connector Pins Definitions

Bus Pin

Signal Mnemonic

AAl

No connection

AB1

No connection

ACl

BDAL16 L

BDAL17L

AE1l

No connection

AF1

No connection

AH1

No connection

AJl

GND

AK1

No connection

ALl

No connection

AM1

GND

AN1

No connection

APl

No connection

AR1

BREF L

AS1

No connection

AT1

GND

AUl

No connection

AVl

No connection

BA1

BDCOK H

BB1

No connection

BC1

BDAL1S L

BD1

BDAL19L

BE1

BDAL20 L

DEQRA/M7533

Table 4 (Cont.):

Module Interface Connector Pins Definltions

Bus Pin

Signal Mnemonic

BF1

BDAL21 L

BH1

No connection

BJ1

GND

BK1

No connection

BL1

No connection

BM1

GND

BN1

No connection

BP1

No connection

BR1

No connection

BS1

No connection

BT1

GND

BU1

No connection

BV1

AA2

AB2

No connection

AC2

GND

AD2

No connection

AE2

BDOUT L

AF2

BRPLY L

AH2

BDIN L

AJ2

BSYNC L

AK2

BWTBT L

AL2

BIRQ4 L

AM2

BIAKI L

DEQRA/M7533

Table 4 (Cont.):

Module Interface Connector Pins Definitlons

Bus Pin

Signal Mnemonic

AN2

BIAKO L

AP2

BBS7L

AR2-AS2

JUMPERED

AT2

BINIT L

AU2

BDALOO L

AV2

BDAIO1 L

BA2

BB2

No connection

BC2

GND

BD2

+12

BE2

BDALO2 L

BF2

BDALOS L

BH2

BDALO4 L

BJ2

BDALO5 L

BK2

BDALO6 L

BL2

BDALO7 L

BM2

BDALOS L

BN2

BDALOS L

BP2

BDAL1OL

BR2

BDAL11L

BS2

BDAL12 L

BT2

BDALIS L

302

BDALI4 L

DEQRA/M7533

Table 4 (Cont.):

Module Interface Connector Pins Definitions

Bue Pin

Signal Mpemonic

BV2

BDAL15 L

GND

M2-N2

JUMPERED

R2-852

JUMPERED

GND

DESQA/M3127

DESQA Ethernet Adapter
The DESQA-~S is a microprocessor—based device that provides all the logic
necessary to connect to the Ethernet. The DESQA provides an interface
from the Q-bus to ThinWire, thickwire (standard), or IEEE 802.3 network.
It is fully supported by both the PDP-11 and MicroVAX families, which are
available in BA200-series enclosures.
Ordering Information
DESQA-S Q-bus to Ethernet adapter module
Gap filler assembly (gap filler and two flathead screws)

70-24505-01
M3127-PA

BNC tee-connector

12-25869-01

BNC 50-chm terminators (2)

12-26318-02

Cable clamp (ThinWire)

12--29702-01

Operating System Support
VMS
DECnet RSX

RSTS

ULTRIX-32
VAXELN

DSM-11

RT-11

Diagnostic Support
MicroVaX Diagnestic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 3.01 (release 126) and later
Six LEDs

Documentation

DESQA Technical Manual

EK-DESQA-TM

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Field Maintenance

MP-01369

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Technical Manual

EK-H4000-TM

Ethernet Installation Guide
DECconnect System Planning and Installation Guide
MDM User's Guide?

EK-ETHER-IN
EK-DECSY-CG
AA-FMT7AE-DN

DESQA Field Maintenance Print Set
Print Set

MP-02435

YIncluded in the MicroVAX Systems Maintenance Kit (ZNABX-GZ, C5).

DESQA/M3127

Documentation
Guide to Networking on VAX/VMS

AA-Y512B-TE

NIE User's Guide

AA-H106A-TE

Introduction to Local Ares Networking

EB-22714-18

The Ethernet, A Local Area Network, Data Link Layer,

AA-K759B-TK

and Physical Layer Specification

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Losds

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watis

Insert

DESQA-SA

M3127

2.4

0.22

14.64

3.3

0.5

Table 1:

DESQA-S (M3127-PA) (Jumper)

Jumper Selection

Function

Middle pin row to ThinWire pin row

ThinWire

Middle pin row to thickwire pin row

Thickwire (standard)

Table 2:

DESQA-S (M3127-PA) (Switch)

Switch Selection

Function

Thickwire (standard)

ouT

ThinWire

CAUTION: The ThinWire /thickwire switch should only be used with the
system power turned off.

Fizures 1 and 2 show the module layout with jumpers and switch.

DESQA/M3127

Flgure 1:

DESQA (M3127-PA) Module Layout/Jumpers
m

Factory Setting

Jumper Block

Closed
162
53 84 &

UUUUU

ThinWire —J L Thickwire

(Standard)

Open

r—— |
0oo

[__'_]

)

—

=
S—
i

[

wiooosms

DESQA/M3127

Figure 2:

DESQA (M3127-PA) Module Layout/Switch

P
s A A

Factory Setting
Closed

ThinWire (OUT)
ra

Thickwire

(Standard) (iN)

Open

MLO-003580

DESQA/M3127

Tabie 3:

CSR Address Selsction

Switch

Position

Function

231

closed

Selects CSR address 17774440 (factory setting)

open

Selects CST address 17774460 (second DESQA)

—

Reserved

closed

Selects normal mode (factory setting)

open

Selects DEQNA lock mode

S4 rlosed

S8 closed

Remote boot disabled (factory setting)

S4 closed

53 open

Sanity timer disabled at power up

S4 open

S3 closed

Remote boot enabled at power up

S4 open

53 open

Sanity timer enabled at power up

—_—

Reserved

DFA01/M3121-PA

DFAO1T Modem
The DFAO1 is an option for BA200-series enclosures only.
Ordering Information
Module (M3121-PA)

DFAQ1-AA (factory installed)
DFAQ1-AF tfield upgrade!

Operating System Support
Version 4.0 and later
Version 4.6.a and later
2.2

Micro/RSX
MicroVMS
ULTRIX-32
Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Documentation

Version 2.0 irelease 1151 and later

DFA01 Modem User’s Guide
DFAO1 Modem Option Installation Guide

o
EK-CAB16-TM
EK-DFA01-IN

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+H5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DFA0O1-A

M3121-PA

197

0.4

14.7

The DFA01 quad-height modem, shown in Figures 1 and 2, consists of a pair
of 300/1200/2400 bits/s direct connect modems and a DZQ11 interface. This
modem is designed as a Q22-bus device for BA200-series enclosures only.
The DFA01 modem uses standard dial-up telephone service to transmit and
receive serial binary data.

The DFAO1 is a full-duplex device based on the CCITT V.22 bis technology.
You can install up to eight DFAO1 modules in a BA200-series enclosure for
a 2- to 16-line capability in the United States and Canada.

Microsystems Options

DFAQ1/M3121-PA
Figure 1:

DFA01 Module with Handle

MLO-001029

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist

strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when

work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

you

DFAQ01/M3121-PA
The DFAO1 contains four switchpacks with 28 switch settings. The location
of the switchpacks and their factory configurations are shown in Figure 2.
The DFA01 module is configured at the factory for connection to single and
multiline telephone service.

Figure 2:

DFAO01 Module Layout (M3121-PA)

5S4

sS4

= —

$10

R REERE
MLO-001030

Microsystems Options

DFAC1T/M3121-PA
Use switchpack S2, switches 1 through 10, to set the CSR address of the
DFAO1. Use switchpack S1, switches 3 through 8, to set the interrupt
vector. The following tables list the factory configurations for the CSR
address and interrupt vector:
DFAOL CSR RAddress:
Switchpack S2

17760100

(factory poasition)

Address Bits:

Al2

All A10 A9

S2 Switches:

Interrupt Vector:
Switchpack S1

300

(factory position)

Vector Bits:

Vé

vs5

€1

CSR Address

17760100
1

= closed,

0 = open

DFAO1

Switches:

Vector Address

300:
1

= closed,

0 = open

The remaining switches on switchpack S1 have the following functions:
81 Switch Function

Result

ON = line three DCOK.

Causes a pulse on the DCOK line

ON = line three Boot/Halt.

Causes a halt condition on the CPU

ON = MTSTO asserted.

All sermal inputs are looped to their correspond-

ON = MTST1 asserted.

All outputs are floated to a high impedance state,
and the state of MSTO ts invalid.

ing outputs.

Switchpacks 53 and S4 contain switches for PR/PC (programmed operation)
and MI/MIC (mode interconnect sense).
Switchpack S3 controls these
settings for modem A, and switchpack S4 controls these settings for modem
B.

Microsystems Options

DFA01/M3121-PA

PR/PC is used for programmable connections such as FJ41S or RJ455
when the wall jack has a resistor (installed by the local phone company) to
program the output level of each modem’s transmitter. PR/PC 1s enabled
and disabled using switch S1 in each switchpack. The factory configuration
is PR/PC disabled; S2 is enabled, allowing permissive operation.
Note that S1 and S2 cannot both be enabled at the same time. To enable
PR/PC (S1), you must disable MI/MIC (S2).

Use MI/MIC for keyed telephone operation from the handset. You enable
MI/MIC using switches S3 and S4 in each switchpack. When MI/MIC is
enabled, the modem can sense these lines.

The factory configuration is
MI/MIC disabled. Table 1 lists the factory positions.

Table 1:

DFAO1 S3 and 5S4 Factory Positions

S3 and S4
Switches

State

Open (PR/PC disabled

Closed {permissive operation enabled:

Open

Open {MI'MIC disabled

iMIMIC disabled:

Microsystems Options

DHV11/M3104

DHV11 8-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
Ordering Information
Module (M3104)

DHV11-M

DHV11 cabinet kits

BA23

BA123

H9642~J

CK-DHV11-AB

CK-DHV11-AA

CK-DHVI11-AF

30-cm (12-in) cable

BC0O5L-01

50-cm (21-in) cable

BCO5L~1K

90-cm (36-in) cable

BC05L~03

Type-B filtered connector

H3173-A

Loopback connectors

H3277 (internal)
12-156336~07 (external)

H329 (internal)
H325 (external)

Operating System Support
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX

Version 2.2 and later
Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4.1m and later

RSTS/E

Version 9.5 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

All versions and releases
Version 2.1 (release 134):

VDHAEO.BIC, VDHBEIL.BIC,
XDHVIO.OBJ.
One LED (On indicates correct opera-

)

Mic

€@

tion.)

Power-up self-test LEDs

ptions

DHV11/M3104

Documentation
EK-DHVI11-TM

DHV11 Technical Manual

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DHV11-M

M3104

4.5

0.55

291

0.5

B2)

NOTE: Each cabinet kit includes two type-B filtered connectors and the
appropriate pair of cables.
The DHV11 asynchronous multiplexer, shown in Figure 1, provides support
for up to eight serial lines for data communications. The DHV11 is a quad-

height module with the following features:
*

Full modem control

Direct memory access (DMA) or silo output

Silo input buffering

Split speed

The DHV11 is compatible with the following modems:
DIGITAL—DFO01, DF02, DF03, DF112
AT&T—103, 113, 203c, 202d, 212

Microsystems Options

DHV11/M3104
Figure 1:

DHV11 Module Layout (M3104)

LOW CHANNELS (0-3)

HIGH CHANNELS (4-7)

glAGNOSTIC LED

==l

ADDRESS
AND
ADDRESS VECTOR
SELECT
SELECT

Jle 1

BACKPLANE CONNECTORS

=7
MLO-001031

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

DHV11/M3104

Use switchpacks E58 and E43 (Figure 1) to set the CSR address and
interrupt vector. The CSR address and interrupt vector are floating, and
depend on the other modules in the system. The following tables list the
factory configurations for the CSR address and interrupt vector:

DHV11l

CSR Address:

17760460

(factory position)

Switchpacks ES58 and E43

Address Bits:

Al2

All A10 A9

E43 and ES8

Switches:
CSR Addresses:

17760440

17760460

17760500

17760520

300

(factory position)

=o0on,

DHV11

0= off

Interrupt Vector:

Switchpack E43
Vector Bits:®

VB8

Vé

E43

)

300

310

Switches:

Addresses:

= closed,

* E43

switch 2

= open

not

used.

Figure 2 shows the internal cabling for the DHV11l.

When installing

internal cables, make sure you connect the red stripe side to pin A (pin 1) of
the DHV11 connectors. Then install the other end of the cables by aligning
the red stripe with the small arrow (pin 1) on the filtered connector.

Microsystems Options

DHV11/M3104

Figure 2:

DHV11 internal Cabling

Microsystems Options

DHV11/M3104

DHV11 Remote Distribution Cabinet Kit
Ordering Information
BA23

BA123

H9642-J

CK-DHV!1-VB

CK-DHV11-VA

CK-DHV11-VF

Type-B filtered connector

H3176

Remote distribution panel

H3175

3-m (10-ft) external cable

BC22H-10

30-cm (12-in} internal
cable

BCO05L-01

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

BCO5L-1K

90-cm (36-in) internal

BC05L-03

Cabinet kit

cable

Operating System Support
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

Verswon 4.0 and later
Version 2.2 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4.1m and later

RSTS/E

Version 9.5 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Manitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Microsystems Options

All versions and releases
None

DHV11/M3104

The DHV11 remote distribution cabinet kit, shown in Figure 3, lets you
distribute eight data-only serial lines from one type-B filtered connector,
by using a remote distribution panel. This option increases the number of
11 serial lines you can connect to an enclosure without using additional
DHV
distribution inserts. Each cabinet kit includes two cables.
Figure 3:

DHV11 Remote Distribution Cabinet Kit

BCO5L-XX CABLES

D
R

TO DHV1 41 ,

12 15633600

LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
a.

o
PO

f
|

BC22H 10

RED STRIPE
TOPIN A

TODHV11 42

MLD 001033

Microsystems Options

DHV11/M3104
The kit includes the following parts:
Part No.

Description

H3176

Bulkhead panel that fits into one type-B /O panel cutout

H3175

Remote distribution panel with eight 25-pin, D-subminiature connectors

H315-B

Loopback connector

BC22H-10

3-m (10-ft) cable that connects H3175 panel and H3176 panel

BCO5L~xx!

Two cables that connect the DHV11 to the H3176 panel

1xx designates length of cable.

The H3176 bulkhead panel is a type-B panel with two 40-pin headers and a
fully filtered female 25-pin, D-subminiature connector. The H3176 connects
to a DHV11 via two BCO5L—xx cables, which supply eight pairs of data
signals (transmit/receive) plus the signal ground for each pair.
The H3175 remote distribution panel distributes the eight pairs of data
signals and their signal grounds to eight male 25-pin, D-subminiature
connectors. The H3175 connects to the H3176 panel via the BC22H-10
cable. The H3175 has teardrop cutouts on both ends. You can mount
the H3175 either vertically or horizontally on a wall or floor. The H3175
measures 279 mm x 86 mm x 17.7 mm (11 in x 3.4 in x 0.7 in).

DIV32/M7531

DIV32 Synchronous Communications Controlier
The Digital ISDN controller 100 (DIV32) is a single-board synchronous communications controller that provides Intergrated Services Digital Network
(ISDN) interface to the VAX 4000 and Q-bus MicroVAX 3000 series systems.
The DIV32 connects directly to the BA200 and BA400 series enclosures.
The DIV32 Synchronous Communications Controller has the following features.

High performance, 64-Kbit/second, circuit-switched access to ISDN ser-

Allows two protocols to run simultaneously, one on each channel, and

Reduces communication line cost with traffic-sensitive time-cutting mode.

VAXISDN software manages ISDN call control and customer-application
development on host.

Software allows any VMS based Ethernet node to manage the ISDN

vices via Q-bus VAX systems.

to one or two different destinations.

connection.

Ordering Information
DIV3z-SA

The VAX 4000 and Q-bus MicroVAX 3000 series

DIV32-SF

Field installed

BC23T
BC23T

systerns, factory installed

3 meters (10 feet) ISDN BRA cable; ISO 8877
7.6 meters (25 feet) ISDN BRA cable; 1SC 8877

NOTE: Cables must be ordered separately.
Related Documentation
EK-DIV82-UG

DIV32 User Guide

DIV32/M7531

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Ampse)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+ 5V

+12V

Watts

DIV32-SA

6.6

0.0

27.50

3.5

1.0

DLVJ1/M8043

DLVJ1 4-Line Asynchronous Interface
Ordering Information
Module (M8043)

DLVJ1 cabinet kit
Type-B filter connector
30-cm (12-inm) intemal

DLVJ1-M
BA23

BA123

HY642

CK-DLVJ1-LB
70-19964-00
70-16436-1C

CK-DLVJ1-LA

CK-DLVJ1-LF

70-19964—-00

70-19964-00

70-16436-1K

70-16436-03

cable

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

90-cm (36-in) internal
cable

Operating System Support
RSX-11M
RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.3 and later
Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5 4D and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

All versions and releases

XXDP

. BIC.
Version 2.1 (release 1341 VDLAB1

Power-up self-test LEDs

None

Microsystems Options

DLVJ1/M8043

Documentation
DLV11-J User’s Guide

EK-DLV1J-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DLVJ1-M

M8043

1.0

0.25

8.0

1.0

The DLVJ1 (formerly DLV11-J), shown in Figure 1, is a dual-height module
that connects a Q-bus to up to four asynchronous serial lines (channels 0
through 3) for data communications. The serial lines must conform to EIA
and CCITT standards. The DLVJ1 acts as four separate devices. The
factory configuration of the module sets CH-3 as the console serial line
unit (SLU).

Microsystems Options

DLVJ1/M8043

Figure 1:

DLVJ1 Module Layout (M8043)

)

000

:oooo

R .:.:
J3

M o=

HRE
g3 E5ea

vwkyn

000 @

50123.L

0000

JO
g8

:II..

gg—;

RI10

%otfixao!oxguzo:so o:g
-

Olp

ele

EDSP

mmr:ag-'.::o:\:::mo

EDSP

olo

LLL
7

EDSP

I00>

e
MLO-001034

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Use wire-wrap pins, as shown in Figure 1, to set the CSR address and
interrupt vector for the DLVJ1. The CSR addresses for two DLVJ1 modules
are fixed.

Microsystems Options

DLVJ1/M8043
The following table lists the factory configuration for the CSR address of
the first channel (CH-0).

DLVJ1l

CSR Address:

17776500

CH-0 CSR

Module

(factory position)*

Address Bits

Address

Al2

All Al0 A9

17776500

1-x

1-% 1-x 0-x

1l-x

x-h

O-x

17776540

1-x

l-x 1-x 0~-x

1-x

x-h

1-x

0-x = 0,
R = 0,

x-h =

1-x =1

no wire-wrap

wire-wrap on pins x and h

* C1

and
C2 are wire-wrapped on pins 1 and x. This sets the
CH-3 CSR
address
to
17777650.
To use CH-3 as a non-console
device, wire-wrap Cl and C2 on pins 0 and x.

The CSR address of the other channels is 10g greater for each additional
channel. For example, if CH-0 is 17776500, the CH-1 CSR address is
17776510. The CSR address for CH-2 is 17776520, and so on. There is one
exception: when CH-3 is used as the console device, its address is fixed at
17777560, regardless of the setting of the other channels.
The DLVJ1 interrupt vector floats. The actual interrupt vector depends
on the other modules in the system. Set the interrupt vector of channel 0
only at X00 or X40. The interrupt vector of the remaining channels is 10
(octal) greater for each channel. For example, if the module is set at 300,
then the interrupt vector of CH-1 is 310. The interrupt vector for CH-2 is
320, and so on. There is one exception: when CH-3 is used as the console
device, its interrupt vector is fixed at 60, regardless of the setting of the
other channels. Figure 2 shows the internal cabling for the DLVJ1. The
following table lists the factory configuration for the interrupt vector:
DLVJ1l

Interrupt Vector:

Vactor

Bits:

Vector

300

Address:

340

300

Vé

(factory position)*

veE

x-h x-h

O0-x

x-h x-h

1-x ~-

x-h =

jumper

inserted between pins

O0-x =

jumper

inserted between

and x.

l-x

jumper

inserted between

and x.

CH-3

interrupt vector

Microsystems Options

(receive)

and h.

and 64

(transmit).

DLVJ1/M8043
DLVJ1 Internal Cabling

A 4

Figure 2:

Microsystems Options

DOMV11/M8053/M8064

DMV11 Synchronous Controller
Four versions of the DMV11 option are available for different types of
system interfaces:
EIA RS232-C/CCITT V.28
CCITT V.35/DDS
Integral modem

RS423-A/CCITT V.24
Make sure you order the version that meets the interface requirements of
your system.

Ordering Information
Loopback connectors

H3251 (external)

H3255 (internal)

H3254 (internal

ElA RS232-C/CCITT V.28

Module (M8053)

DMV11-M

External cable

BC22E or BC22F

Cabinet kit

BA23

BA123

H9642-J

CK-DMV1i-AB

CK-DMV11-AA

CK-DMVI11-AF

Distribution panel

70-20863-01

30-cm (12-in) internal

BC085--01

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

BC08S-1K

90-cm (36-in) internal
cable

BC085S-03

BA23

BA123

H9642-J

cable

CCITT V.35DDS

Module (M8053)

Cabinet kit

DMV1I-M

CK-DMV11-BB

CK-DMVI11-BA

CK-DMVI11-BF

63-cm (25-in) external
modem cable

BC17E-25

30-cm (12-in) internal

70-20861-01

53-em (21-in) internal
cable

70-20861-1K

90-cm (36-in) internal
cable

70-20861-03

cable

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/M8064

Ordering Information
Integral Modem
Module (M8064)

DMVII-N

BA23

BA123

HY642-)

CK-DMV11-CB

CK-DMV11-CA

CK-DMV11-CF

Distribution panel

70-20862-00

30-cm (12-in) internal
cable

70-18250-01

Cabinet kit

70-182560-1K

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

70--20861-03

90-cm (36-in) internal
cable

RS423-A/CCITT V.24
Module (M8053)

DMVii1-M

External cable

BC55D
BA23

BA123

HY9642-]

CK-DMVIL-FB

CK-DMVI1-FA

CK-DMVI11-FF

Distribution panel

70-20864-01

38-cm (15-in} internal
cable

BC08S-1C

Cabinet kit

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

BCO8S-1K

BC085-03

90-cm (36-in) internal

cable

Cperating System Support
MicroVMS

Version 4.2 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

All versions and releases

XXDP

Version 2.1 (release 1341

VDMAC1.BIC,

BCMBCO.BIN, VDMCC1 BIN,
VDMDCO BIN,

Power-up self-test LEDs

Microsystems Options

None

VIDMECO BIN.

DMV11/M8053/M8064

Documentation
EK-DMV11-TM

DMV 11 Synchronous Controller Technical
Manuasl

DMV11 Synchronous Controller User's Guide

ERK-DMV11-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DMVI1i-M
DMVII-N

M8053
MB064

3.4
3.4

04
0.26

21.8
20.12

2.0
2.0

1.0
1.0

A
A

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/M8064
The DMV11 is a single-line, synchronous interface that provides local or
remote interconnection between Q-bus systems and other computer systems
with EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, CCITT V.35, or EIA RS-423/RS—449
interfaces.

The quad-height DMV11 modules, shown in Figures 1 and 2, support the
following functions:
Full-duplex or half-duplex operations
Direct memory access (DMA)
Point-to-point communications
Multipoint communications

Figure 1:

DMV11-M Module Layout (M8053)

[ EV13

E101

Ao|N
v

M8053

E54
£E53

7
MLO-001038

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/M8064
Figure 2:

DMV11-N Module Layout (M8064)

£V19

——]

E107

MB064

E59
E58

f
MLO-001037

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

For the DMV11-M, use switchpacks E53 and E54 (Figure 1) to set the CSR
address and interrupt vector. For the DMV11-N, use switchpacks E58
and 59 (Figure 2) to set the CSR address and interrupt vector. The CSR
address and interrupt vector both float. The actual settings depend on the
other modules in the system.

The following tables list the factory configurations and typical switch
positions for the CSR address and interrupt vector:

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/MB8064
DMV11l CSR Rddress:

Switchpacks E53,

Address Bits:

Alz2

Switchpacks:

E53
E58

Switches:

177760340

E54,

£58,

(factory position)

and E59

All AlO0 A9

(M8053)

E54

(MBO053)

(MB064)

E59

(MB064)

177760340

177760360

CSR Address:

= on

DMV1l

closed,

0 = off = open

Interrupt Vector:

(factory position)

Vé

300

310

- O

ES4

Bits:

300

and E59

Vector

ES54

[

Switchpacks

and ES9

Switches :
Vector

1 = on

Address:

closed,

0 = off

= open

You can select several DMV 11 features with a DIP switch: switch E101 on
M8053, and switch E107 on M8064 (Figures 1 and 2). Table 1 lists typical
switch settings and functions. Table 2 lists the different operating mode
selections.

Table 1:

DMV11 Switch Positions

E101/E107

Typical

Setting

Function

E101-S10?

Off

Off for EIA interface, on for V.35,

Off

Switch!

Must be off for integral modem (M8064) or when running
above 19.2 Kbaud.

58. 87, Se

Select operating mode when S1 is off. See Table 2.

'E101 is on M8053. E107 is on MB064
INot used on M8064.

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/M8064

Table 1 (Cont.):

DMV1i1 Switch Positions

E101/E107

Typical
Setting

Function

When off, enables remote load detect.

When off, enables power-on boot.

When off, enables auto answer.

Switch!

Selects unit number for booting.

On = first DMV11.

Off = second DMV 11.

Determines method for selecting the operating mode.
Off = 86, 87, and S8 select the operating mode.

See Table 2, below.
On = software selects the operating mode.

TE101 is on M8053 E107 is on MR0BA4.
Table 2:

DMV11 Operating Modes

E101/E107 Switch

Operating Mode!

HDX point-to-point, DMC compatible

Off

FDX point-to-point, DMC compatible

Off

HDX point-to-point

Off

FDX point-to-point

Off

HDX control station

Off
Off

On
Off

Off
On

FDX control station
HDX tributary station

Off

FDX tributary station

'"HDX = half-duplex, FDX = full-duplex

Another DIP switch determines the DIGITAL data communications
message protocol (DDCMP) address register tributary/password: switch
E113 on M8053 and switch E119 on M8064. You must set this switch to
a unique site address. For more information, see the DMV11 Synchronous
Controller User's Guide.

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/M8064

Figures 3 and 4 show the internal cabling for the four DMV11 interfaces.
Figure 3:

DMV11-M Internal Cabling (M8053)

MLO-00 1038

Microsystems Options

DMV11/M8053/M8064

Figure 4:

DMV11-N Internal Cabling (M8064)

M8064

5’1

MLO-0 1039

Microsystems Options

DPV11/M8020

DPV11 Synchronous Interface
Ordering Information
Module (M8020) for BA23.
BA123, and H9642-J

DPV11-AA (factory installed)

DPV11--AF (field upgrade)
BA23

BA123

H9642-J

CK-DPV11-AB
BC261-01

CK-DPV11-AA

CK-DPV11-AF

Type-A filtered connector

70-17261-01

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

BC2bl~-1K

Module (M8020-PA) for
BA200-series

DPV11-M

90-cm (36-in) internal
cable

BC261.-03

DPV11 cabinet kit
30-cm (12-in) internal
cable

Loopback connectors

H3259 (external)
H3260 tinternal)

Operating System Support
DSM-11
MicroVMS

Version 3.3 and later

DPV11-M: Version 42 and later
DPVI11-AA/-AF: Version 4 6A

and

later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

All versions and releases
Version 2.1 irelease 134)
VDPVC1 BIN,

XDPVCO0.0BJ.

Power-up self-test LEDs

None

Microsystems Options

DPV11/M8020

Documentation
DPV11 Synchronous Interface User's Manual
DPVil Technical Manual

EK-DPV11-UG
EK-DPVII-TTMM

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Power

Bus Loads

Watts

Insert

—%

DPV1l-M

DPV11-A

M8020

M8020-PA

1.2

0.3

0.30

9.6

1.0

The DPV11-M is a dual-height module.
It connects the Q22-bus to a
modem, using a synchronous serial line. The serial line conforms to EIA
standards RS232-C, RS422-A, and RS423-A. The quad-height DPV11-A
consists of one DPV11-M module and a panel support with an attached
bulkhead handle.
The DPV11 provides EIA compatibility for local communications only
(timing and data leads). The DPV11 is intended for two types of protocols:
*
¢

Character-oriented protocols, such as DIGITAL data communications
message protocol (DDCMP)
Bit-oriented communications protocols, such as synchronous data link

control (SDLC)
The M8020 module layout is shown in Figure 1. The M8020-PA module
layout is shown in Figure 2.

Microsystems Options

DPV11/M8020
DPV11-M Module Layout (M8020)

Figure 1:

| S—

823
22

O —Ajo1t

010

w18

89
8

J1 85

83121314\516\7
4

000000

25%23

4201043

440|045
400'0

‘

380039

360037

35
3400
33
32010
o
300l31

w29
W

MO -001040

Microsystems Options

DPV11/M8020
Figure 2:

DPV11-A Module Layout (M8020--PA)

f/\
MLO-001041

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.
Use jumpers, shown in Figure 1, to set the CSR address and interrupt vector

of the DPV11. The CSR address and interrupt vector are both floating. The
actual DPV settings depend on the other modules in the system.

Microsystems Options

DPV11/M8020
The following tables list the factory configurations and other common
positions for the CSR address and interrupt vector:

DPV11l CSR Address:

17760010

Addraess Bits:

Al2

All Al0 A9

Pins:

W31

W30 W36 W33

A7
A6
W32 W39 W38

A5
A4
A3
W37 W34 W35

17760270

0
0

0
1

0
0

0
1

1
1

17760310

CSR Address:
17760010

0 =

(factory poesition)
AB

jumper inserted between pin Wxx and pin 29

(ground).

jumper removed.

DPV1l

Interrupt Vector:
V7

300
V6

(factory position)

Vector Bits:

Pins:

W43 W42 W4l

W40 w44 W4S

Vv4

300

310

Vector Address:

jumper inserted between pin Wxx and pin 46

jumper removed.

(ground).

Microsystems Options

DPV11/M8020

Figure 3 shows the internal cabling of the DPV11.

Figure 3:

DPV11 Internal Cabling

MLO-001042

Microsystems Options

DRQ3B/M7658

DRQ3B-A, -S High-Speed, Parallel Interface
Ordering Information
Module (M7658) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642-J
Module (M7658-PA) for
BAZ200-series

DRQ3B-A

Loopback connectors

17-00861-01 tinternal)
17-01481-01 (external)

DRQ3B-SA (factory installed)
DRQ3B--SF (field upgrade)

Operating System Support

VAXELN

Version 4.6.a and later, using VAXlab
Software Library, or standalone driver
Version 3.0 and later

VMS

Version 5.0 and later, using VAXlab

MicroVMS

Software Library

Version 2.2 and later

ULTRIX-32

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 2.0 (release 115) and later

Documentation
DRQ3B Parallel DMA /O Module User's

EK-047AA-UG

Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DRQ3B-A
DRQ3B-S

M7658
M7658-PA

4.5
4.5

0.0
0.0

225
225

20
2.0

1.0
1.0

A2)
-

The DRQ3B-A, -8 parallel direct memory access (DMA) I/0 module allows
input and output of parallel digital data at transfer rates of up to 1.3 MHz
of 16-bit words. It is designed to provide maximum data transfer rates with
a minimum of system bus interaction.

Microsystems Options

DRQ3B/M7658
The DRQ3B-S is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1:

DRQ3B-S Module Layout (M7658-PA)

PORT 0 CONNECTOR

PORT 1 CONNECTOR

o —

[ T—

TERMINATOR
RESISTOR PACKS

SWITCHPACK

SWITCHPACK
>

ES8

Ra2 W5 Wa
12K

w2 [
- -

Wa AND W5

(REV C AND HIGHER ONLY)

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Use DIP switchpacks 0 and 1 (Figure 1) to set the CSR address and
interrupt vector on the DRQ3B. The CSR and interrupt vectors float.
Use Switch 08 of switchpack 1 to set the extended block mode. The extended
block mode increases data transfer rates by approximately 20 percent to 1.3
MHz (words). It cannot be used in MicroPDP-11 systems. Setting switch
08 to ON selects the extended block mode.
The following tables list the factory configuration and positions for a second
DRQ3B:

Microsystems Options

DRQ3B/M7658

DRQ3B CSR Address:
Switchpack

17760740

(factory position)

Address Bits:

Al2

All Al0 A9

Switches:

17760740

17760760

10=*

CSR Address:

1 = switch on,

0 = awitch off

not

Switch

used.

DRQ3B Interrupt Vector:

300

(factory position)

Switchpack 1
Vector Bits:

Switches:

300

310

Vector Address:

gwitch on,

= switch off

Use switches 9 and 10 of switchpack 1 to configure the interrupt priority
level, as follows:
Switchpack 1
Priority

Level

DRQ3B Holdoff Time Selection
Whenever the DRQ3B releases the bus, it waits a short period of time

(called the holdoff time) before it again requests control of the bus.
DRQ3B holdoff time can be set to 1 or 2.7 usec.

The

The holdoff time of 2.7 usec ensures that other modules installed in a system
have an opportunity to acquire the bus. However, the maximum throughput
rate of the DRQ3B cannot be achieved using this setting.

Microsystems Options

DRQ3B/M7658
The maximum throughpnt rate is achieved using the 1 usec holdoff time
and extended block mode. However, when the holdoff time is set for 1 psec,
modules in the backplane farther from the CPU than the DRQ3B may have
difficulty acquiring the bus.

Selecting the holdoff time depends on the module revision level, as follows:
Holdoff Time
Module Revision

1.0 usec

2.7 psec

Level C and higher

Jumper W4 In

Jumper W5 In (factory)

Level B

Resistor R42 (12K ohms)

installed (factory)

removed (factory)

NOTE: R42 can be resoldered to the module by Field Service if the 1 usec
holdoff time is needed again.

DRQ3B Q/CD Jumpers
Jumpers W2 and W3 must be removed when the DRQ3B is installed in a
BA200-series enclosure.

DRQ3B Terminator Resistor Packs
The DRQ3B has replaceable terminator resistor packs. Some signals from
external devices may not be strong enough to assert a high or low signal
clearly, due to cabling length or to the nature of the device driver. In
this case, Field Service can replace the factory resistor packs with optional
packs, to allow weaker signals to be interpreted correctly.
The optional packs must be installed by Field Service.
available resistor packs.

Table 1:

Table 1 lists the

Terminator Resistor Packs
Resistance

Current Needed

(milliamps)

Notes

13-18367-01

220/330

Standard

13-11003-02

330/680

Optional

13-11003-01

180/380

Optional

Order Number

{ohms)

Microsystems Options

DRV11-J/M8049
DRV1J-S/M8049-PA

DRV11-J, DRV1J-S 4-Line, High-Density Parallel
interface
Ordering Information
Module (M8049) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642-J

DRV11-J

Module (M8049-PA) for

DRV 1J-8A (factory installed)

BA200-series

DRV11-J cabinet kit

38-cm (15-in) internal

DRV1J-8F tfield upgrade)
BA23

BA123

H9642

CK-DRV1IJ-KA

CK-DRV1J-KB

CK-DRV1J-KF

BCO6L~1C

cable

Type-A filter connector

12-14614-02

53-cm (21-in) internal

BCO6L~1K

BC061L--03

cable
90-cm (36-in) internal
cable

Loopback connectors

BCOSWA 1MB049»
BCO6R (M8049-PA,

Operating System Support

DSM-11

MicroVMS

Version 3.3 and later

Version 4.6 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

VMS

Version 5.0 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

Diagnostic Support

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

XXDP

Version 1.10 (release 110) and later

Version 2.1 (release 134): VDRCCOQ.BIC,
VDRDBO.BIC, XDRJC0.0RJ.

Power-up self-test LEDs

One LED (On indicates correct operation}

Microsystems Options

DRV11-J/M8049
DRV1J-5/M8049--PA
Documentation
ER-DRV1J-UG

DRV11-J Interface User's Manual

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DRV1i-d
DRV1J-S

MB049
MB049-PA

1.8
18

00
0.0

9.0
9.0

2.0
2.0

i.0
10

A(2)
-

NOTE: Each cabinet kit includes two type-A filter connectors and two
internal cables.
The DRV11 is a dual-height module that connects a Q-bus to 64 1/O lines.
These lines are organized as four 16-bit ports, A through D. Data line
direction is selectable under program control for each 16-bit port. The

DRV11-J is shown in Figure 1.

Microsystems Options

DRV11-J/M8049
DRV1J-S/M8049-PA
Figure 1:

DRV11—J Module Layout (M8049)
gy

"/T
PORT A AND B

E10

XEQ fl_wxo

w3\\BB{/W5

¢ ]
PORT C AND D

W4flfl&/ w2
e

ADDRESS SELECTION
MLO-001044

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when vou
work with the internal parts of a computer system.
The CSR address is fixed, using jumpers W1 through W9. The DRV11-J

interrupt vector is set under program control. The following table lists the
factory configurations and the positions for a second DRV11 module.

DRV11-J CSR Address:

17764160

Address Bits:
Jumpers:

wWe

A6
W7

All Al0 A9
W3
W4

Module

17764160

177641490

installed,

Al2

(factory position)

removed

Microsystems Options

DRV11-J/M8049
DRV1J-S/M8049-PA
Figure 2 shows the internal cabling for the DRV11-J.

DRV11-/ Internal Cabling

Figure 2:

MLO-00 1045

Microsystems Options

DRV11-W/M7651
DRV1IW-S/M7651-PA

DRV11-WA, DRV1IW-S General-Purpose DMA
Interface
Ordering Information
Module (M7651) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642~J
Module (M7651-PA) for

BA200-series

DRV11-WA cabinet kit
30-cm (12-in) internal

DRV11-WA

DRV 1W-SA (factory installed)

DRV 1W-SF (field upgrade)
BA23

BA123

H9642

CK-DRV1B-KA

CK-DRVIB-KF

CK-DRV1B-KF

BCO6K-~-1C

cable

Type-A filter connector

12-14614-01

53-cm (21-in) internal
cable

BCO6K-1K

80-cm (36-in) internal
cable

BC06K-03

DSM-11
MicrovMS

Version 3.3 and later
Version 4 4 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 3.0 and later

VMS

Version 4.0 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 1.06 (release 106! and later
None

Microsystems Options

DRV11-W/M7651
DRVIW-S/M7651-PA
Documentation
DRV 11-WA General Purpose DMA
User’s Guide

EK-DRVWA-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DRVI1-W
DRVIW-8

M7651
M7651-PA

1.8
18

0.0
0.0

9.0
9.0

20
20

1.0
1.0

Ai2)
-

NOTE: Each cabinet kit includes two internal cables and two type-A filter
connectors.

The DRV 11 is a general-purpose DMA interface for transferring 16-bit data
words directly between MicroVAX Il systems and a user’s I/0 device. The

DMV11-WA is shown in Figure 1.

Microsystems Options

DRV11-W/M7651
DRV1W-S/M7651-PA

DRV11-WA Module Layout

Figure 1:

J;’

wigow2

VECTOR ADDRESS,022/Q18

€| SELECTION SWITCHES

DEVICE ADDRESS

SELECTION SWITCHES

| E40 |

[0]

[—

MLO-001046

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuils. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

The factory position for the DMA interface base address is 17772410. In
this case, the base address is the address of the word count register WCR,
not the CSR register. The following tables list the factory positions for
the device address switch and the interrupt vector. The base address and
interrupt vectors float, so the factory setting must be changed.
DRV11-WA Base Address:

17772410

(factory position)

Switchpack ES50

Addraess Bits:
Switches:

Alz
1

All A10 A9
4
3
2

AB
5

A7
6

A6
7

A5
8

A4
9

A3
10

Base Address:

17772410

17760240*

]

17760260

1 =o0n,

0= off

* First possible floating value

Microsystems Options

DRV11-W/M7651
DRVIW-S/M7651-PA
DRV11-WA Interrupt Vector

Switchpack E40
Vactor Bits:

veE

Vv4

Switches:

0
4]

0
0

0
1

1
1

0
4]

1l
0

0
0

1
0

Vector Address:

124
300*
l=o0n,

0= off

* First possible floating value

Switch E40-9 is not used.
addressing.

Switch E40-10 must be on to enable 22-bit

Table 1 lists three other features selected by jumpers. Figure 2 shows the
DRV11-WA internal cabling.

Table 1:

DRV11 Jumper-Selected Features

Feature

Jumper

Installed

Setting

Unlimited burst

4-cycle burst (factory)

Link mode

w3
W4

Normal mode (factory)
Link mode

Interrupt mode

w5
W6

Independent interrupt (factory)
Ready interrupt

Burst mode

Microsystems Options

DRV11-W/M7651
DRV1IW-S/M7651-PA
Figure 2:

DRV11-WA Internal Cabling

Microsystems Options

DSV11/M3108

DSV11 Communications Option
Ordering Information
Module (M3108) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642J
Module (M3108~PA) for
BA200-series

DSV11-AA first DSV11 option)
DSVI11-AB textra DSVI11 option)
DSV11-8A (factory installed, first DSV11
option)

DSV11-8B (factory installed, extra DSV11
option)

DSV11-8F (field

upgrade,

first

DSV11

option)

DSV11-SG (field upgrade, extra DSV11
option)

BA23 cabinet kit

CK-DSV11-UA

BA123 cabinet kit

CK-DSV11-UB

HY9642-} cabinet kit

CK-DSVHII-UF

Loopback connectors iexternal)

H3199 (50-pin)
H3198 (34-pin)
H3248 125-pin}
H3250 i34.piny

Operating System Support
VMS

Version 4.7 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 2.3 (release 124) or later

Microsystems Options

DSV11/M3108

Documentation
DSV11 Communications Option
Technical Description

EK-DSV11-TD

DSV11-M Communications Option

EK-DSVIM-IN

Installation Guide

DSV11-M Communications Option

EK-DSVIM-UG

DSV11~-SF Communications Option

EK-DSV11-IN

D8V11-S Communications Option

EK-D8V11-UG

User Guide

Installation Guide
User Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Meodule

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DSV1ii-M

M3108

5.43

0.69

380

1.0

pSV11-8

M3108-PA

543

0.69

38.0

3.9

1.0

The DSV11 is a two-channel, high-speed, synchronous communications

option for use on @Q-bus backplanes. The DSV11-S is shown in Figure 1.

The DSV11 supports the following synchronous communications protocols:
DDCMP
HDLC/SDLC
BISYNC
The DSV11 allows any of the following synchronous interfaces:
RS-423
RS-422
RS-232/V.24
V.35

Microsystems Options

DSV11/M3108

Figure 1:

DSV11-S Module Layout (M3108-PA)

=
=
W__m}&_r‘

E32

HHUDII

BUUHIIBIHU
FACTORY SETTINGS

H = SWITCH ON (CLOSED) = 0
= SWITCH OFF (OPEN) = 1
ML0-001048

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Use switchpack E32 (Figure 1) to set the CSR address. The CSR address
floats. The actual DSV11 settings depend on the other modules in the
system.

The interrupt vector also floats. It is set by the software and cannot be
changed by switches.

’

Use switchpack E89 (Figure 1) to select the DSV11 bus grant and DMA

continuity.

Microsystems Options

DSV11/M3108

The following tables list the configurations for the CSR address and for the
bus grant and DMA continuity:

DSV11l

CSR Address:

17760640

(factory position)

Switchpack B32

Address Bita:

Al2

All A10 A9

E32

Switches:

CSR Address:

17760640

17760740

= open,

0 = closed

DSV1l

Bus

Grant

and DMA Continuity

Switchpack E89

= open,

0 = closed

Microsystems Options

4
(=
o o]

DSVil-SF

3
OO

Q/CD Slots

Q/Q Slots

DSV1l-M,

[«

DSV11-M,

1
(=
= 3]

EB89 Switches

6
0

(factory position)

0
1

DECvoice/DTCO5

DECvoice Multiline Voice Processing Subsystem
DECvoice, the DTCO05 option is a quad-width Q-bus module that provides
voice generation and recognition capability. DECvoice software allows the
DTCO05 option to operate in either Multiline mode (8 lines) to support
digitized speech or in the full function mode (single) to support digitized
speech and enhanced functionality such as recognition and synthesis.
Multiline DECvoice provides users with the tools necessary to customize the
isolated word recognition capabilities for application-specific vocabularies.
Ordering Information
DTCN5-UG

T1 DECvoice upgrade kit processing module

DTCO05-SA

Factory installed DECvoice processing module

CL-42RS]-VA

8-Line VAXserver aystem

CL-42RTI-VA

8-Line VAX timesharing system

CL—42HSI-VA

CL-42HTI-VA
CL+43JSI-CA

(VAXserver 4000 Model 200)
(VAXserver 4000 Model 200)
16-Line VAXserver system

(VAXserver 4000 Model 200)
16-Line timesharing system
(VAXserver 4000 Mode! 300)
24-Line VAXgerver system

(VAXserver 4000 Model 300)

CL—43JSI-DA

72-Line VAXserver system

CL—43J82-AA

48-Line dual-host VAXserver aystem (VAXserver 4000 Model 300)

CL43JT1-AA

24-Line VAX timesharing system

(VAXserver 4000 Model 300)

(VAXserver 4000 Model 300 dualhost timesharing system)

CL-43JT2-AA

48-Line dual-host VAXserver aystem (VAXserver 4000 Model 300
dual host timesharing system)

Functional Information
Maximum lines per cabinet

Lines per system option

Upto 8

Microsystems Options

DECvoice/DTCOS

Related Documentation
Multiline DECvoice Hardware Installation Manual
DECwvoice Software Reference Manual

EK-DVMIS-IN
AA-LESSC-TE
AA-PB3HA-TE
QA-VFUAA-GZ

DECvoice Software Installation Manual

DECvoice Software Documentation

Configuration Information
Form factor
VAX 4000-300

Quad height
11 DTCO05 (9 modules) support

VAX 4000-200 (BA430)

Six DTC05 modules support 48

VAX 4000-200 (BA215)

Two DTCOSs support 16 lines in
Multiline mode or two lines in

72 Multiline, plus two modules
support single-line full function
mode.
lines in Multiline mode or 6 lines
in single-line full function mode.

single- line full function mode.

MicroVAX 3800/3900

Nine DTCO5 (six modules) support
48 lines in Multiline mode and three

telephone lines to support singleline full function mode.

MicroVAX 3500/3600

Six DTC06 (three modules) support 24 telephone lines in Multiline mode and three lines to support single-line full function mode.

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current

(Amps)

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

DTC06-8A

DECvoice

4.0

0.0

DTCNS-UG

Upgradekit

7.17

Microsystems Options

0.0

Power

Bus Loads

Watts

156.8

35.8

1.5

DZQ11/M3106

DZQ11 4-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
Ordering Information
Module (M3106) for BA23,
BA123, and H9642-J

Module (M3106-PA) for
BA200-geries

DZQ11-M

DZQ11-SA (factory installed)
DZQ11-SF (field upgrade)
BA23

BA123

H9642

CK-DZQ11-DB
70-19964-00

CK-DZQ11-DA
70-19964-00

CK-DZQ1l1-DF
70-19964-00

BCO5L. -01

53-cm (21-in) internal

BCO5L-1K

90-cm (36-in) internal

BC05L-03

DZQ11 cabinet kit
Type-B filter connector
30-cm (12-in) internal
cable

cable

Loopback connectors

H3277 tinternal)

12-15336-07 (external)
H329 tinternal)

H325 (external)

Operating System Support
MicroVMS
ULTRIX-32m

Version 4.1m and later
Version 1.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

All revisions
None

Microsystems Options

DZQ11/M3106

Documentation
DZQ
11 Asynchronous Multiplexer

EK-DZQ11-UG

User's Guide

DZQ11 Asynchronous Multiplexer
Technical Manual

EK-DZQ11-TM

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DZQ11-M

M3106

1.0

0.36

932

1.5

DZQ1I1-$

M3106-PA

1.0

0.36

1.4

1.0
0.5

The DZQ
11 15 a dual-height module that connects the Q22-bus to as many as
four asynchronous serial lines. The DZQ11 conforms to the RS232-C and
RS423-A interface standards. The DZQ11 permits dial-up (autoanswer)
operation with modems using full-duplex operations, such as AT&T models
103, 113, 212, or the equivalent,

The DZQ11-M module layout is shown in Figure 1. The DZQ11-S module
layout is shown in Figure 2, and the module handle is shown in Figure 3.

Microsystems Options

DZQ11/M3106

Figure 1:

DZQ11-M Module Layout (M3106)

=
N

VECTOR

SWITCHPACK

E13

ADDRESS

SWITCHPACK

£28

J—
MLO-00 1049

Microsystems Options

DZQ11/M3106

Figure 2: DZQ11-S Module Layout (M3160-PA)

A
ADDRESS
SWITCHPACK

VECTOR
SWITCHPACK
MLO-001050

4. Microsystems: Options

DZQ11/M3106

Figure 3:

DZQ11-S Handle (BA200-Series)

pzan
M3106

-PA

MLO-

220787

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

DZQ11/M3106

UJse switchpacks E28 and E13 (Figure 1 or 2) to set the module’s CSR

address and interrupt vector. The CSR address and interrupt vector float.

The actual positions depend on the other modules in the system. The
following tables list the factory configurations and other common positions
for the CSR address and interrupt vector:
D2Ql1l

CSR Address:

17760010

(factory position)

Switchpack E28

Address Bite:

Al12

All A10O A2

828 Switchaa:

17760010

17760100

]

17760110

17760120

CSR Address:

= closed,

DZQll

= open

Interrupt Vector:

300

(factory position)

Vv?7

Vé

300

310

Switchpack E13
Vector

Bits:

El3 Switches:
Vector Address:

= closed,

= open

Microsystems Options

DZQ11/M3106
Figure 4 shows the internal cabling for the DZQ11-M.
Figure 4:

DZQ11-M Internal Cabling

MLO--00105%

Microsystems Options

DZV11/M7957

DZV1i1 4-Line Asynchronous Multiplexer
Ordering Information
Module (M7957)

DZV11-M
BA23

BA123

H9642-J

DZV11 cabinet kit
Type-B filter connector
30-em (12-in) internal

CK-DZV11-DB
70-19964-00
BC05L-01

CK-DZV11-DA
70-19964-00
-

CK-DZVi11-DF
70-19964-00
-

53-cm (21-in) internal

RCO5L-1K

90-cm (36-in) internal

BCO05L-03

cable

Operating System Support
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX

Version 2.2 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4. 1m and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5.4D and later

ULTRIX-~11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Version 4.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

Version 1.06 (release 106! and later
Version 2.1 (release 1341
VDZAD3.BIC,

VDZBD0.BIC, VDZCB1.BIN,
VDZDAO BIN

Power-up self-test LEDs

None

Microsystems Options

DZV11/M7957

Documentation
EK-DZV11-TM

DZV11 Asynchronous Multiplexer
Technical Manual
DZV11 Asynchronous Multiplexer
User’s Guide

EK-DZV11-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

DZV1i-M

M7957

1.2

0.39

10.7

The DZV11, shown in Figure 1, is a quad-height module that connects a
Q22-bus to as many as four asynchronous serial lines. The DZV11 conforms
to the R5232 interface standard. The DZV11 permits dial-up (autoanswer)
operation with modems using full-duplex operations, such as AT&T models
103, 113, 212, or the equivalent.

Microsystems Options

DZV11/M7957
Figure 1:

DZV11 Module Layout (M7957)

wol
L
W6
W8 —eET E2@-

oSO

—

rfirfci_—;c

w12

W3 W14 Wi

wis
£2

£30
A2

VECTOR
SWITCHES

ADDRESS
SWITCHES

Wi wii
AW

MLO-001052

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.
Use switchpack E30 to set the CSR address, and switchpack E2 to set the
vector address (Figure 1). Both the CSR address and interrupt vector float,;
their settings depend on the other modules in the system. The following
tables list the factory configuration for the CSR address and interrupt
vector:
DZV11l CSR Address:

17760010

(factory positiocn)

Switchpack E30

Address Bits:

Al2

All Al10 A9

E30

17760010

17760100

Switches:

CSR Address:

= closed,

open

Microsystems Options

DZV11/M7957
DEV1I1I

300

Intaerrupt Vector:

(factory position)

Switchpack E2
Vector Bits:

Vv7

Switches:

Vector

Vvé

Address:

300

1l = clo.ad,

0 = open

Table 1 lists the DZV11 jumpers (Figure 1) and their configurations.
Jumpers W1 through W8 are used to control modems. Jumpers W1 through
W4 connect data terminal ready (DTR) to request to send (RTS); these
jumpers must be installed to enable you to run external test diagnostic
programs. Jumpers W5 through W8 connect the forced busy (FB) leads to
the RTS leads; with these jumpers installed, the assertion of an RTS lead
places an on or busy signal on the corresponding forced busy lead.

Table 1:

DZV11 Jumper Configurations

Jumper

Position

Description

DTR to RTS, line 03.

DTR to RTS, line 02.

DTR to RTS, line 01.

DTR to RTS, line 00.

RTS to FB, line 03.

RTS to FB, line 02.

RTS to FB, line 01.

RTS to FB, line 00.

W9o, Wi2, W13,
W14, W15, W16

Do not remove; used only for manufacturing tests.

W10, W11

Remove only when the module is used where the CD
rows are connected to an adjacent module.

Microsystems Options

DZV11/M7957
Figure 2 shows the DZV11 internal cabling.
Figure 2:

DZV11 Internal Cabling

Microsystems Options

EF51R

EF51R Solid State Disk
The EF51R is a 5.25-inch, DSSI-based solid state disk (SSD). It features an
integrated data retention system that combines battery backup protection with
a hard disk to preserve data in the event of a power failure. It provides 107
megabytes of storage space for BA4xx-based systems and expander cabinets.

Ordering information’
EF51R SSD for BA4xx-based systems and
expanders (factory installed)
EF51R SSD for BAdxx-based systems and
expanders (field installed)

EF51R-AA
EF51R-AF

Storage Capadhty

Data storage capacity

107 megabytes, formatted

Performance

Average access time
Peak transfer rate

0.25 milliseconds
800 /O transfers/second

Physical Spécifications
Height
Width

8.26 cm (3.25 in)
14.6 cm (5.75 in)

Depth

20.32 ¢m (8.0 in)

Weight

2.55 kg (5 Ib 10 oz)

Conflguration Information

Form factor

5.25-inch

Power Requirements

+5 Vde, 0.0 A
+12 Vde, 1.5 A (typical)

+12 Vdc, 2.3 A (peak)
Power consumption
1No cables are required.

18.0 W (typical)

EF51R

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.4-3 and later

Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-test diagnostic (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.
See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Release 137A and later

Related Documentation

EFb5xx-Series Solid State Disk Service Guide
EF5xx-Series Solid State Disk User Guide

EK-EF5XX-SG
EK-EF5XX-UG

BA400 Storage Devices Installation
Procedure

EK-BA44A-IN

EF52R

EF52R Solid State Disk
The EF52R is a 5.25-inch, DSSI-based solid state disk (SSD). It features an
integrated data retention system that combines battery backup protection with
a hard disk to preserve data in the event of a power failure. It provides 205
megabytes of storage space for BAd4xx-based systems and expander cabinets.
The EF52R is not available in Europe.

Ordering information’
EF52R SSD for BA4xx-based systems and
expanders (factory installed)
EF52R SSD for BA4xx-based systems and
expanders (field installed)

EF52R-AA
EF52R-AF

Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

205 megabytes, formatted

Performance

Average access time

Peak transfer rate

0.25 milliseconds
800 I/O transfers/second

Physical Specifications

Height

8.26 cm (3.25 in)

Width

14.6 cm (5.75 in)

Depth

20.32 ¢m (8.0 in)

Weight

2.55 kg (5 1b 10 oz)

Configuration information

Form factor
INo cables are required.

5.25-inch

EF52R

Power Requirements
+5 Vde, 0.0 A

+12 Vdc, 1.4 A (typical)

+12 Vdc, 2.2 A (peak)
Power consumption

16.6 W (typical)

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.4-3 and later

Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-Test diagnostic (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.
See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Release 137A and later

Related Documentation

EF5xx-Series Solid State Disk Service Guide

EFxx-Series Solid State Disk User Guide
BA400 Storage Devices Installation
Procedure

EK-EF5XX-SG
EK-EF5XX-UG
EK-BA44A-IN

EF53

EF53 Solid State Disk
The EF53 is a 5.25-inch, DSSI-based solid state disk (SSD). It provides 267
megabytes of storage space for BAdxx-based systems and expander cabinets.
The EFS3 is available only in Europe.

Ordering Information’
EF53 SSD for BAdxx-based systems and
expanders (factory installed)
EF53 SSD for BA4xx-based systems and
expanders (field installed)

EF53-AA
EF53-AF

Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

267 megabytes, formatted

Performance

Average access time
Peak transfer rate

0.25 milliseconds
800 I/O transfers/second

Physical Specifications

Height
Width

8.26 ¢cm (3.25 in)
14.6 cm (5.75 in)

Depth

20.32 cm (8.0 in)

Weight

2.55 kg (5 1b 10 o2)

Configuration information

Form factor

5.25-inch

Power Requirements

+5 Vde, 2.2 A (typical)
+5 Vdc, 3.7 A (peak)

+12 Vdc, 0.0 A (typical)
+12 Vde, 0.1 A (peak)
No cables are required.

EF53

Power Requiremants

Power consumption

11.2 W (typical)

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.4-3 and later

Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-Test diagnostic (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.
See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Release 137A and later

Related Documentation

EF5xx-Series Solid State Disk Service Guide
EF5xx-Series Solid State Disk User Guide
BA400 Storage Devices Installation
Procedure

EK-EF5XX-SG
EK-EF5XX-UG
EK-BA44A-IN

IBQO1/M3125

IBQO1 BITBUS Controller
The IBQO1 BITBUS control system uses hardware, software, and firmware
to provide an interface between intelligent devices using BITBUS and application software running on a MicroVAX II.
Ordering Information
ElA RS485 BITBUS controller interface for
system installation
Cable kit for use with MicroVAX Il in BA123
enclosure (21-inch cable)

IBQO1-AA

Cable kit for use with MicroVAX II in BA23
enclosure (12-inch cable)

CU-IBQ01-AB

Cable kit for use with MicroVAX II in H9642
enclosure (36-inch cable)

CU-IBQO1-AF

EIA RS485 BITBUS controller interface for
factary installation into BA213, BA215, and
BA220 enclosures

(MS125-PA) IBQO1-SA

EIA RS8485 BITBUS controller interface for
fiald installation into BA218, BA215, and

IBQO1-SF

Gap filler assembly (gap filler and two flathead screws)

70-24505-01

CK-IBQO1-AA

BA220 enclosures

Operating System Support
Ethernet Server Kit (BA214 enclosure)
Loopback Connector (used in Service Mode)

ZNAO7-CM, CP, or Cb
IBQO1-TA

MicroVAX I1 MDM

MDM diagnostics

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test

Version 1.01

MieroVAX Syatem Maintenance Kit

ZNABX-~GZ, Cb

IBQO1/M3125

Documentation
IBQO1 BITBUS Controller User’s Guide

EK-IBQO1-UG

MDM User's Guide

AA-FM7A-DN

IBQO1 BITBUS Installation Guide
IBQSF Option Installation Guide

EK-IBQO1-IN
EK-IBQSF-IN

IBQO1 BITBUS Controller Technical

EK-IBQ01-TM

Manual

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Module

IBQO1-AA
TRQO1-SA/SF

Bus Loads

+12V

Watts

0.0

256.0

4.6

0.0

25.0

4.6

+5V
o

Option

Power

Module Order

Insert

Use the following recommended module list to help you correctly install the
IBQO1 module in a BA200-series enclosure.

KA630/KA620/KA640/KAG50/KAG55
MS630-B/C
MRV11-D
DEQNA
DPV1l
DFAOQ1
DZQ11
CXA16
CXB16
CXY08
TEQ11 (no restrictions on position)
IBQO1 (no restrictions on position)
DRQ3B
DRV1IW
TQKS50 (not applicable in BA214 enclosure)
RQDXS3 (not applicable in BA214 enclosure)
The IBQO1 has an interrupt priority of 4.

IBQO1/M3125

Configuring the IBQO1
Set the IBQO1 BITBUS controller address using switch pack E75. Factory
setting is 760770. If more than one IBQO1 is used, use word size = 4. See
Figure 1.

CSR Address

Address

Rank

Size

Modulus (Octal)

CSR

Address

Rank

Size

Modulus (Octal)

Vector

Vector Address

Speed
Synchronous Mode

Speed

2.4 Mbits/s

Number of nodes par segment

Number of segments

Total allowable distance

30 meters (99 ft)

Total number of addresses

Speed~-low

62.5 Kbita/s

Maximum segment distance

1200 meters (3937 ft)

Number of nodes per segment

Number of segmenta

Maximum segment distance

80 meters (99 ft)

Total allowable distance

13,200 meters (43,310 £&)

Total number of addresaes

250

IBQO1/M3125

Speed

Self-Clocked Mode

Speed-high

875 Kbita/s

Numbear of nodes par segment

Number of segments

Total allowable distance

900 meters (2953 ft)

Total number of sddresses

Marximum segment distance

300 meters (984 ft)

IBQO1/M3125

Figure 1:

1BQO1 Module Layout (M3125)

NOTE

2 [ fl

THISSETTING

FOR 375K

JE 8

SPEED IN

SWITCH
1t

1
0

0
1

0
0

0=
0=

BITS/SEC

625K

375K

2am

RED
GREEN

\—-——\__‘

,7__..4

renmmmoas/

SPEED

sppct

ADDRESS

ADDRESS AND

SELEC!

VECTOR SELECT
[SR

1D~

110 ADDRESS BIT

1211109

SET FOR 760770

a0
100Ag

-] L

BaaE E fia
c
M«

BACKPLANE CONNECT(ORS

BIT
ECTOR ADDRESS

VEC

2 3 4 56 7 8 9
SET FOR 300

MLO-003581

IEQ11/M8634

IEQ1T Communications Controlier
Ordering Information

Module (M8634-PA) for
BA200-series
Loopback connector

[IEQ11-SA tfactory installed)
IEQ11-5F (field upgrade)
BNO1A-02
IEEE

IEC

IEQ11-AC

IEQI1-AD

Module (M8634)

IEQ11

Internal cable

BN11J-0C

BN11K-0C

BN11M-0C

BNI11L-0C

IEQ11 system for BA23, BA123,
and H9642-J

Type-B filtered connector
Optional cable for 2nd controller

Operating System Support

MicroVMS

Version 4.2 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 1.08 irelease 108) and later

Documentation

IEUI-AJTEQ11-A User’s Guide

EK-IEUQ1-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

[EQ1
IEQ11-S

M8634
M&634-PA

3.0
35

00
0.0

15.0
175

2.0
2.0

1.0
1.0

B
-

Microsystems Options

IEQ11/M8634
The IEQ11 provides interface functions with the IEC/IEEE bus, a standard
instrumentation bus. Figure 1 shows the M8634 module; the M8634-PA
module layout is the same, and contains an attached BA200-series bulkhead
handle to connect to external devices.

Figure 1:

I1EQ11 Module Layout (M8634)

A AP

(——

1
J1

SWITCHPACKS

ces ][]
wé

—

o=t

LTM

— =
MLO-001054

The following IEEE 488-1978 interface functions are available from the
IEQ11 system:
Automatic source handshake

Remote local

Automatic acceptor handshake

Parallel poll

Talker and extended talker,
includes serial poll capability

Device clear

Listener and extended listener

Device trigger

Service request

Controller

Microsystems Options

IEQ11/M8634

When you order an IEQ11-AC or -AD system, you receive the M8634
module, one module-to-bulkhead cable, and an 1/O bulkhead panel. You
can order an optional second cable to connect the second controller on the
IEQ11 module to the same bulkhead panel.
When you order an IEQ11-SF, you receive the M8634-PA module and a
loopback connector (BN0O1A-02).

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts ofa computer system.

Two DIP switchpacks and eight jumpers determine the IEQ11 module
configuration (Figure 1). Use switchpack E41 to set the CSR address, and
switchpack E46 to set the interrupt vector. Remove jumpers W1, W4, W5,
W6, W7, and W8. Install jumpers W2 and W3,
The following tables list the factory configurations for the IEQ11 CSR
address and interrupt vector:

IEQ1l

CSR Address:

17764100

(factory position)

Switchpack E41

Address Bits:

Al2

All Al0 A9

E41

sS4

Switches:

=o0n,

IEQ1l

[

17764100

[«

CSR Address:

= off

Interrupt Vector:

270

(factory position)

Switchpack E46
Vector Bits:

Vé

Vvs

E46

Se6

Switches:

Vector

Address:

300
1

=o0on,

0 = off

Figure 2 shows the internal cabling for the M8634 module (IEEE version).
The cable that connects to J1 on the module is included with the option.
The second cabie is optional. IEC cabling (not shown) also uses a type-B
filtered connector and two cables.

Microsystems Options

IEQ11/M8634
Figure 2:

IEQ11 (M8634) Internal Cabling (IEEE Version)

SWITCH
Ed

e SWITCH

£46

MB634
MODU LZ

17.00384-01

IOF TIONAL
1EC 625 BUS

CABLE)

O1
BN11E

{EC-625 BUS CABLE

AND 1’0 PANEL)

M1 0-001055

Microsystems Options

KDA50/M7164/M7165

KDAS50-Q Disk Controller
This option is available for the H9642—J and H9644 cabinets only.
Ordering Information
KDAS5O0 controller kit
KDAS50-Q controller processor module

KDA50-QA
M7164-00

KDA50-Q controller SDI module

M7165-00

50-conductor module interconnect cable

70-18448-00

40-conductor module interconnect cable

70-18447-00

Internal SDI cable

17-00951-03

Type-B filter connector (2)

70-21937-01

Operating System Support
DSM-11

Version 3.3 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4.2 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-~11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.2 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.1 and later

Micro/RSTS

Version 2.2 and later

Diagnostic Suppeort
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 1.06 (release 106) and later
Four LEDs (M7164)
Four LEDs {M7165)

Microsystems Options

KDAS50/M7164/M7165

Documentation
EK-KDA5Q-UG

KDA5S0-Q User's Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Option

Module

+HV

Watts

KDA50-Q

M7164

6.93

KDA50-Q

M7165

6.57

Bus Loeads

34.65

3.0

0.5

33.21

Insert

The KDA50-Q controller connects up to four 16-bit RA series drives to the
Q22-bus. The KDA50-Q consists of two quad-height modules: the processor
module and the standard disk interface (SDI) module. The KDA50-Q is an
intelligent controller with on-board microprocessors. Host system programs
communicate with the controller and drives by using the mass storage
control protocol (MSCP).
Figures 1 and 2 show the jumper, switch, and LED locations on the KDA50Q controller module set.

Microsystems Options

KDAS0/M7164/M7165

Figure 1:

KDA50-Q Processor Module Layout (M7164)

LEDs

%W
1

L—«'E’_-_J 00'00

M7164

W3 W2

]

N
MLO-001056

Microsystems Options

KDA50/M7164/M7165
Figure 2:

KDAS50-Q SDI Module Layout (M7165)

LEDS

JL_
1

cooof

n
3

84210 PiN

—]r

———
T

50 PIN

SDI CONNECTOR

M7165

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits.

Use the wrist

strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts ofa computer system.
The KDA50-Q is an MSCP device. The CSR address for the first MSCP
device in a system is 17772150, Use the switchpack on the M7164 processor
module (Figure 1) to set the CSR address. If you install more than one
MSCP device, you must set the CSR address of the second device within
the floating range. Figure 3 shows how to operate the address selector
switch.

Microsystems Options

KDA50/M7164/M7165
Figure 3:

KDA50-Q Address Selector Switch

ROCKER

IAODIFIED ROCKER

QFF POSITION

ON POSITION

OFF POSITION
RED BAND HERE

ON POSITION

SLIDER

OFF POSITION

ON POSITION

RED BAND HERE

NOTE

(N EACHILLUSTRATION, SWITCHES 1 THROUGH 9 ARE SHOWN IN
THE OFF POSITION, AND SWITCH 10 1S SHOWN iN THE ON POSITION

Microsystems Options

001058

KDAS0/M7164/M7165
The factory configuration for the CSR address is shown below.
MSCP CSR Address:
Address Bits:
M7164 Switches:

17772150
Al2
Wl

(factory position)

All AlQ0 A9
S1
52
83

AB
54

A7
85

A6
s6

A5
87

A4
S8

A3
s9

A2
810

CSR Addresa:

17772150

Possible settings

for a second MSCP device:

17760334

17760354

17760374

= gwitch on

0 =

switch off

or M7164
or M7164

jumper Wl
jumper Wl

1
i

in.
cut.

The interrupt vector for the KDA50-Q is set under program control. The
first MSCP device is assigned a fixed interrupt vector of 154. If you install
a second MSCP device (KDA50-Q), its interrupt vector floats.
NOTE: Ifyou use an RQDX disk controller, always make the RQDX the first

MSCP device in the backplane and give the KDA50 a floating CSR address.
Figure 4 shows the internal cabling for the module set intended for the
H9642—J cabinet.

Microsystems Options

KDAS50/M7164/M7165
Figure 4:

KDAS0-Q Internal Cabling

M7164

M7165

50-CONDUCTOR
FLAT RIBBON CABLE
40-CONDUCTOR

FLAT RIBBON CABLE

BULKHEAD
'

ASSEMBLY

INTERNAL

SDt CABLE

SLOTFORG

{H3490y

SLOT J OR K

MLO-001059

Microsystems Options

KDAS0/M7164/M7165
Power-Up Tests
Figure 5 shows the KDA50-Q LEDs for both the M7164 and M7165
modules. Table 1 lists the LED error codes. When the table lists two
codes for the same error, both codes indicate the same failure. The order of
the KDA50-Q LEDs is reversed (1 2 4 8) when you view the module with
the handles placed horizontally (chips upward).
Figure 5:

KDA50-Q Module LEDs

Table 1:

KDASO LED Error Codes

8421!

M7164

8421'

M71656

Value

Hex

Most Likely

Error Symptom

Failure

0001

XXX

Undefined

Not used

0010

0000

Microcode stuck in init step 2

M7164 or software

0011

0000

Microcode stuck in init step 3

See Note 1.

0100

0000

Microcode stuck in init step 4

M7164 or host inactive

Q-bus timeout error

010F

0000

4/5

Test successful. Normal operating display.

0110
XXXX

XXXX
0110

Undefined

Not used

om
XXX

XXXX
o1

Undefined

Not used

1000

0000

Wrap bit 14 set in SA register

M7164 or software

11 = on, 0 = off, X = either on or off, F = flashing

Microsystems Options

KDAS0/M7164/M7165

KDASO LED Error Codes

Table 1 (Cont.):
M7164

M71656

8421

Value

Error Symptom

Failure

1001

0000

Board one error.

M7164

10610

0000

Board two error

M7i65b

1010

1011

XXXX

Undefined

Not used

1100

Timeout error, check error

8421!
0000

1001

1011

XXX

XXXX
1100

XXXX

Hex

Most Likely

code 1n SA register

Many causes.

See Table

2-2 in KDA5O-Q User's
Guide

1101

XXXX

RAM parity error

M7165

i110

XXXX

ROM panity error

M7164

1111

Sequencer error

M7164

None

See KDASO LED Error

XXXX

1101

1110

XAXX

Cyeling

Codes below,

'1 = on, 0 = off, X = either on or off, F = flashing

KDAS0 LED Error Codes
*

Error code 3 (0011) usually occurs during installation.
The error
indicates that the KDA50-Q tried to access memory via the Q22-bus.
The module detected a problem during a direct memory access (DMA).
Here are four typical causes for this error, with suggested solutions.
1.

Q22-bus routing in the backplane.
You may need to install grant continuity cards in unused module
slots (either dual or quad), to ensure that DMA devices that are
installed on the Q22-bus later will work correctly. Routing problems
seldom occur when another DMA device is installed immediately
after the KDAS0-Q in a correctly working Q22-bus sequence.
DMA access to memory.
The KDA50-Q may be unable to access memory because of a
problem with the memory or CPU modules. This problem seldom
occurs if another DMA device is installed on the same Q22-bus.

Microsystems Options

KDAS0/M7164/M7165
3.

Grant-passing devices.

Check the applicable CPU maintenance documentation to find what
installed devices come before the KDA50-Q in the Q22-bus grant
continuity sequence. One or more devices may not properly pass
grants to the following devices in the sequence. You must place
the KDA50-Q before any such device(s) in the backplane. Grantpassing problems seldom occur if another DMA device follows the

KDAS50-Q in the Q22-bus sequence.
4.

M7164 module.
If none of the problems above is the cause of this error, the M7164
module may be at fault.

®*

During a cycling pattern, the M7164 LEDs flash first, then the M7165
LEDs. The LEDs flash one at a time, from the least significant bhit

(LSB) to the most significant bit (MSB). The LEDs turn on and off for
about 0.25 second, then repeat at about a 4-second rate. The pattern
happens so rapidly that it appears the LEDs are flashing at the same
time.

The LEDs normally cycle while the KIDA50-Q is waiting for the host to
start the initialization process. At this time, the KDA50-Q responds to
the initialization and the cycling pattern stops. This action normally
occurs in about 4 seconds if the system software is ready to establish a
connection with the KDA50-Q.
If the cycling pattern continues veyond the start of the initialization
process, the KDA50-Q is not responding to the host CPU.

Microsystems Options

KFQSA/M7769

KFQSA Storage Adapter
Ordering Information
Module (M7769) for BA23
Module (M7769) for BA123

KFQSA-AA
KFQSA-BA

Module (M7769) for BA200-series

KFQSA-SA (factory installed)
KFQSA-SF (field upgrade with cables for
internal and external ISEs)
KFQSA-3G (field upgrade with cables for
external ISEs)

Operating System Support

ULTRIX-32m
VAXELN

Version 3.0 and later
Version 3.2 and later
Version 5.0-2A and later

VMS
Diagnostic Support

Version 3.01 (release 126) and later
Six LEDs

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Documentation
KFQSA Installation Manual

EK-KFQSA-IN

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

KFQSA-A/B

M7769

5.5

0.0

27.0

0.5

KFQSA-S

M7769

5.5

0.0

27.0

3.8

0.5

Insert
B

NOTE: Each option kit includes a KFQSA module, preconfigured cabling,
a terminator, mounting hardware, and documentation. See the KFQSA
Installation Manual for a complete list of KFQSA option kit parts and part
numbers.

Microsystems Options

KFQSA/M7769
The KFQSA module is a storage adapter that allows Q-bus host systems
that support the KFQSA to communicate with storage peripherals based
on the DIGITAL Storage Architecture (DSA), using the DIGITAL Storage
System Interconnect (DSSI). One KFQSA module can connect up to seven
integratied storage elements (ISEs) to the host system using a single DSSI
bus cable.
The KFQSA module is a protocol converter that supports Q-bus protocols
to and from the host and DSSI bus protocols to and from the DSSI storage
elemeats. The KFQSA contains the addressing logic required to make
a connection between the host and a requested ISE on the DSSI bus.
Each ISE has its own controller, which contains the intelligence and logic
necessary to control data transfers over the DSSI bus.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.
Check the KFQSA module for the preserce of a jumper intended for
manufacturing use only. The location of this jumper is shown in Figure 1.
Remove the jumper, if present.
Table 1 describes the functions of the
switchpack.

Microsystems Options

switches on the KFQSA DIP

KFQSA/M7769

Figure 1:

KFQSA Module Layout (M7769)
JUMPER

(FOR MANUFACTURING
USE ONLY)
7

FOUR PQSITION
SWITCHPACK

MLO 001878

Tabl2 1:

KFQSA Switch Settings

Switch

Funection

Off position. Switches 2, 3, and 4 are ignored and CSR addresses are read from
the EEROM.

On position. Enables the CSR setting of switches 2, 3, and 4.

Off position. Enables CSR addresses dedicated to the KFQSA. Use only for
initially accessing the KFQSA in order to program the EEROM. Do not use when

running diagnostics.

On position. Enables CSR addresses for mass storage control protocol (MSCP)
or tape mass storage control protocol (TMSCP) devices.
3and
4

When switches 1 and 2 are On and Off, respectively, use these switches to select
one of four dedicated KFQSA CSR addresses.

Microsystems Options

KFQSA/M7769

At installation, use the four-position DIP switchpack on the KFQSA

(Figure 1) as follows to set a temporary CSR address that enables you
to boot the sysiem and access the EEROM:
1.

Set switch 1 to the On position.

Set switches 2, 3, and 4 to reflect a CSR address from one of the tables
below.

Dedicated KFQSA CSR Addresses
KFQSA

Four-Position

(Fixed)

Switchpack

Mode

Fx/F1

MSB

LSB

17774420

17774424

17774430

17774434

Switches:
CSR Address:

Fx/F1 = fixed/floating
1

off,

MSCP

KFQSA

TMSCP

CSR Addresses

Four~Position

Service
Switches:

(Floating)

Switchpack

Fx/Fl

Dk/Tp

Pri/Sec

CSR Address:

17760444

(tape

17774500

(tape primary)

17760334

(disk

secondary)

17772150

(disk

primary)

Fx/Fl1

fixed/floating

Dk/Tp

disk/tape

Pri/Sec
1

off,

secondary)

= primary/secondary
0

= on

The EEROM on the KFQSA contains a configuration table that you
program with the CSR addresses of all the devices in the system. See the
KFQSA Installation Guide for procedures on determining CSR addresses
and programming the configuration table using the MicroVAX Diagnostic

Monitor (MDM). After you have programmed the configuration table,
disable the four-position switchpack by setting switch 1 to the On position.

Microsystems Options

KFQSA/M7769
The KFQSA module has six LEDs, shown in Figure 1: one green and five
red. When you power up the system, all six LEDs light. After the diagnostic

routines complete successfully, only the green LED remains lit. The KFQSA
module reacts to fatal and nonfatal errors, as follows:
¢

Fatal errors:
remain lit.

the green LED goes out and a sequence of red LEDs

Nonfatal errors:
seconds.

the red LEDs display an error code for about 10

The KFQSA LED error codes are listed in Table 2. To provide an error
history, all errors are written into the KFQSA volatile memory.

Table 2:

KFQSA LED Error Codes

LEDs
1234586

Error Code Description

XXXXXX

Drive never powered up, or 8096 CPU error

000000

8096 1n hang state

00000x

CSRD chip test error

0000x0

QMI chip test error

0000xx

Fatal configuration table error

000x00

8096 EPROM test error

000x0x

8096 DPRAM test error (low byte)

000xx0

8096 DPRAM test error (high byte)

000xxx

68000 CPU test error

00x000

68000 10- sec BERR timer test error

00x00x

68000 EPROM test error

00x0x0

68000 local RAM test error (low byte)

00x0xx

68000 local RAM test error (high byte)

00xx00

68000 interrupt controller test error

00xx0x

8254 timer test error

00xxx0

FIFO chip test error

00xxxx

Buffer RAM parity interrupt test error

0x0000

Buffer RAM test error (first 64K, bits 0 through 3)

0x000x

Buffer RAM test error (first 64K, bits 4 through 7)

0x00x0

Buffer RAM test error (first 64K, bhits 8 through 11)

0x00xx

Buffer RAM test error (first 64K, bits 12 through 15)

0x0x00

Buffer RAM test error (second 64K, bits 0 through 3)

0x0x0x

Buffer RAM test error (second 64K, bits 4 through 7)

1LED 1 is green; LEDs 2 through 5 are red.
0=Ofi';x=0n.

Microsystems Options

I KFQSA/M7769

Table 2 (Cont.):

KFQSA LED Error Codes

LEDs

123456

Error Code Description

0x0xx0

Buffer RAM test error (second 64K, bits 8 through 11)

0zx0xxx

Buffer RAM test error (second 64K, bits 12 through 15)

0xx000

SII chip test error

0xx00x

68000 DPRAM test error (low byte)

0xx0x0

68000 DPRAM test error (high byte)

0xx0xx

Microprocessor interrupt test error

0xxx00

Unexpected 68000 BERR

0xxx0x

Unexpected interrupt (68000 side)

0xxxx0

8096 setup complete error

Oxxxxx

Parity error during BRAM test

x00000

POST passed

x0000x
x000x0

Nonfatal CSRD error?
Nonfatal QMI error?

x00x00

Successful retry d-ring a RAM test?

x0x000

Nonfata! QMI DM.s timeout

1LED 1 is green; LEDs 2 through 5 are red.
0=0ff x = On.

2Nonfatal error code displayed for minimum of 10 seconds.

Microsystems Options

KFQSA/M7769

Programming the DSSI Subsystem Using Console
Commands
The KFQSA configuration table may be programmed in two ways, either by
the use of console commands or by using the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

(MDM). Using the console commands is the recommended choice if your
system has this capability.

To find out if you can use console commands for programming the
configuration table, reinitialize the system and read the microcode version
that is displayed on the console.
If the microcode version is 4.1 or
greater, the console commands may be used for programming the KFQSA
configuration table.
If your system has console commands, perform the procedure described in
this chapter. If not, see the KFQSA Installation Guide for procedures on
programming the KFFQSA configuration table using MDM.
To find the console commands available, type HELP at the console (>>>)
prompt. To program the KFQSA configuration table, use these commands.

Determining CSR Addresses
Each module in a Q-bus-based system must use a set of unique Q-bus
addresses and interrupt vectors. One of these, generally the lowest of the

set, is known as the CSR address. The KFQSA emulates an SSP controller!

for each ISE connected, and thus presents a separate CSR address for each
emulated controller. You must program the KFQSA with a correctly chosen

CSR address for every ISE on the DSSI bus. Interrupt vectors for the
KFQSA (and other SSP controllers) are programmed automatically by the
operating system.

Unlike most other Q-bus controllers, KFQSA CSR addresses are not set
with switches or jumpers. They are contaired in nonvolatile memory on

the KFQSA module, in the form of a configuration table. To access the
configuration table, you must set the switches on the KFQSA to select one
of the dedicated addresses.
Before programming the configuration table, first determine what the
CSR addresses should be for all devices on the system. Calculating CSR
addresses is a complex procedure because some devices are assigned floating
addresses. Floating addresses vary with each module installed on the
system.

At the console prompt (>>>) type CONFIGURE.
1 SSP controllers also include the RQDX3, KDA50, RRD50, RQC25, TGK50, and TQK70.
All such poris are identical and are operated by the sgame PUDRIVER.

KFQSA/M7769

The CONFIGURE consocle command is similar to the VMS SYSGEN
CONFIGURE utility. It permits the user to enter Q-bus device names,
and then generates a table of recommended Q-bus CSR addresses.
Enter the command. The system prompts you for a device and a number.
To find what the valid responses are, type HELP. The system displays:
>>>configure

Enter

device

Device,

configuration,

Number?

HELP,

EXIT

help

Devices:

LPV1il

KXJ11

DLV11J

pzZQ11

DZv1i

DFAO1

RLV12

TSVOS

RXV21

DRV11W

DRV11R

pPV11

DMV11

DELQA

DEQNA

RQDX3

KDAS0

RRDSO

RQC25

KFQSA-DISK

TQK50

TQK?70

TUB1E

RV20

KFQSA~-TAPE

KMV11l

IEQ11

DHQ11

DHV11

CXAle

CXBle

CXyos

VCBO1

QEVSS

LNV11

LNV21

QPSS

bsvil

ADV1iC

AAV11C

AXV11C

KWV11C

ADV11iD

ARV11D

VCBO2

QDSs

DRV11J

DRQ3B

vsv21

IBQO1

IDV11A

IDV11B

IDV11C

IDV11D

IAV1la

IAV11B

MIRA

ADQ32

DTC04

DESNA

IGQ11

Numbers:

255,

default

Device, Number?

Respond by entering the device name and number of each device. After all
the devices have been entered, type EXIT. For example, if your system has
a TK70, three RF30s, and a DEQNA, you would respond as follows:
Device, Number?

tk70

Device,

Number?

kfgsa-disk,3

Device,

Number?

degna

Device, Number?

exit

The system responds with CSR address/vector assighments for all entered
devices. For the above example, the response is:
Address/Vector Assignments
=774440/120

DEQNA

=772150/154

RFQSA~DISK

-760334/300

KFQSA-DISK

-760340/304

KFQSA-DISK

-774500/260

TK70

>>>

Record the address/vector assignments for use in the next procedure.

KFQSA/M7769

Programming the KFQSA Configuration Table
In order to program the CSR addresses assigned to the DSSI devices in the
previous section, type the following command at the console prompt.
>>>

set

host/uqssp/maintenance/service n

NOTE: The /service n parameter specifies the controller number of a KFQSA

in SERVICE mode, where n is from 0 to 3
0 is for CSR address 774420
1 is for CSR address 774424
2 is for CSR address 774430
3 is for CSR address 774434

Typing this command displays the current contents of the configuration
table.
For example, suppose the first address is selected and the
configuration table is currently blank.
>>>

set

host/ugssp/maintenance/service

UQSSP

Controller

(774420)

Enter

SET,

SHOW,

Node

CLEAR,

CSR Address

meeeccsso

KFQRSA

HELP,

EXIT,

or QUIT

Model
==w===

Type HELP for a quick reference of the available commands.
?

help

Commands:

SET <node>

\KFQSA

set KFQSA DSSI

SET

<CSR_address><model>

enable

<node>

DSSI

CLEAR <node>

disable

SHOW

show

current

this

node

device

DSSI

device

configuratien

HELP

EXIT

program the

text

QUIT

don't program the KFQSA

KFQSA

Parameters:
<node>

<CSR_address>

760010

<model>

(disk)

777774
or

(tape)

KFQSA/M7769

set

772150

set

760334

set

760340

LIS

BEETS

SRS B AN |

To add the three RF30 ISEs from the example in the previous section, type:

NOTE: Make sure you enter the addresses in the same order they were given

when you used the CONFIGURE command.
Type SHOW to display what you just entered.
show

Node

CSE

Address

Model

772150

760334

760340

eeeeee—-

21
KFQSA

—-www=~-

To delete an entry from the table, use the CLEAR command. For example,
to delete the entry for the ISE with a DSSI node ID of 2, type CLEAR 2 at
the ? prompt.

Type EXIT when you are done programming to write the entries to the
configuration table.
?

exit

Programming

the

KFQSA

...

>>>

Power down the system, remove the KFQSA module, and set switch 1 to the
OFF position, enabling the addresses programmed into the configuration

table to be read. Then power the system back up.
To view devices on the Q-bus, type either SHOW QBUS or SHOW UQSSP
at the console prompt.
The SHOW QBUS command displays all Q-bus I/O addresses that respond
to a word-aligned read. For each address the console displays the address
in VAX 1I/O space (in hex), the address as it would appear in the Q-bus I/O
space (in octal), and the word data that was read (in hex).

KFQSA/M7769
An example of the SHOW QBUS command is as follows:
>>>

show

Scan

gbus

Qbus

I1/0

Space

-20001468

{772150)

~2000146A

(772152)

~20001910

(774420)

~20001912

(774422)

=20001920

(774440)

-20001922

(774442)

~20001940

{(774500)

-20001942

(774502)

Scan

Qbus

R o#

(760342)

(760340)

-200000E2

OAAO

W€

-200000E0

OAAC

00G0

(760336)

0000

-200000DE

OAAD

(760334)

FFO8

Bo#

-200000DC

0000

Memory

0000

(300)

REDX3/KDA50/RRD50/RQC25/KFQSA~DISK

(304)

RODX3/KDAS0/RRD50/RQC25/KFQSA~DISK

(154)

RODX3/KDA50/RRD50/RQC25/KFQSA~DISK

(000)

KFQSA

(120)

DELQA/DEQNA

(260)

TQKS0/TQK70/TUB1E/RV20/KFQSA~-TAPE

OAAO

FFOO
0BCO

Space

S>>

The SHOW UQSSP command displays the status of all disk and tape
devices that can be found on the Q-bus which support the SSP protocol.
For each device the controller number, CSR address, boot name, and type
of device is displayed.

An example of the SHOW UQSSP command is:
>>>

show

ugssp

UQSSP

Disk Controller

~DUAC

(RF30)

UQSSP

Disk

~DUB1

(RF30)

UQSSP

Disk

-DUCZ

(RF30)

UQSSP

Tape

~MUAO

(TK70)

Controller

(772150)

(7€60334)

(760340)

(774500}

>>>

KFQSA/M7769

Programming the KFQSA for Multi-Host Systems
This section describes how to program the KFQSA module in the event you
are setting up a multi-host system. Due to cabling limitations, in practice
this will always involve two adapters and up to six ISEs,
This procedure has three objectives:

To configure both KFQSA modules so that they can access all of the
ISEs connected to the DSSI bus.
To give each KFQSA a unique DSSI node ID.
To configure the KFQSAs and ISEs so that each ISE has a device name
that is unique and universal throughout the cluster.

Figure 2 is a diagram of a typical multi-host application, which will be used

as an example during this procedure.
For purposes of this discussion, the host with the lower number ISEs (0,1,2)
will be referred to as the first system, and the host with the higher number
ISEs (3,4,5) will be referred to as the second system.

NOTE: Both systems should be powered up and displaying the console (>>>)
prompt.

The DSSI cable between the two systems should not be connected

at this time.

Perform the following procedure on the first system.
1.

Display the current addresses and devices as follows:
NOTE: Make hardcopy printouts of the displays, or write down the
information obtained in this step. It will be needed later on.

Type SHOW UQSSP for a display of all SSP controllers currently
on the system. This display lists the Q-bus address (octal) and
port name of each SSP device on the system. An example of this
display is shown in the previous section, Programming the KFQSA
Configuration Table.

Type SHOW QBUS for a display of the eight-digit VAX address
(hex) for each device. An example of this display is shown in the
previous section, Programming the KFQSA Configuration Table.

Find the eight-digit VAX address (hex) that corresponds to the
Q-bus address for each ISE in the system. Record this information,
as it will be needed in a later step.

KFQSA/M7769

Figure 2:

Exampie of KFQSA Dual-Host Configuration

(SECOND KFQSA)

Sy STEM B

SYSTEM A
(FIRST KFQSA]

NODE S]NODE A}NODE 3

NODE EINODE JN\ODE:‘ 0
DSSI
BUS

—

T KFQSA

KFQSA
(NODE 6)

(NODE
7)

ADDRESS

ADDRESS
772150
760334
780349

760344
760350
760354
KFQSA

~R
B WrR
O

W
= O

NODE

772150

760334
760340
760344

760350
760354

KFQSA

O 002414
ML

NOTE: In the examples given for the SHOW UQSSP and SHOW

@BUS commands, the Q-bus address (772150) for ISE 0 has a
corresponding VAX address (hex) of 20001468.

Run the Configure utility to determine the correct address for each
device and module in the dual-host system by performing the following
steps. The Configure utility is explained in more detail in the KFQSA
Installation Guide.
a.

At the console prompt, type CONFIGURE.

Then type HELP at the Levice, Nunber? prompt for a list of devices

that can be configured.
NOTE: Some devices listed in the HELP display are not supported
by the KAB55-AA CPU.

¢.

For each device in the system, type the device name at the
Device,Number? prompt. If there is more than one of the same
device type, enter the device name, a comma, and the total number
of devices of that type.

KFQSA/M7769
Be sure you list all devices in the first system, and the ISEs in both
systems.

Type EXIT. The Configure utility displays address/vector
assignments for all devices entered.

Compare the addresses displayed from running the Configure utility

with those displayed from the SHOW QBUS display.

Adding the ISEs from the second system may bump the address of
another Q-bus device. Make sure that all device addresses, other than
those of the ISEs, have not changed. If the device address differs
between the two displays, you must reconfigure your system.

Program the KFQSA configuration table in the first system by following
the procedures outlined in the previous section, Programming the

KFQSA Configuration Table. Make sure to include all ISEs connected
to the DSSI bus in the configuration table. Assign a DSSI node ID of 7
to this KFQSA.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the second system.

Program the KFQSA in the second system by following the
procedures outlined in the previous section, Programming the KFQSA
Configuration Table. Make sure to include all ISEs in both systems in
the configuration table. Assign a DSSI node ID of 6 to this KFQSA.
Power down both systems.

Remove the KFQSA modules and set switch 1 on both modules to the
off position.
Connect the DSSI cable between the two systems.
10. Replace any necessarv DSSI unit ID plugs in the Operator Control

Panels of each system to make them match the DSSI node IDs assigned
to the ISEs for the multi-host configuration.

NOTE: Make sure all DSSI ID sockets in both Operator Control Panels
have plugs in them. Use blank plugs in any sockets that do not have
corresponding ISEs connected.
11. Power up both systems.

12. For each system:

Type SHOW QBUS to verify that all addresses are present and
correct.

KFQSA/M7769

Type SHOW UQSSP to verify that all ISEs are displayed correctly.

NOTE: Make sure that the ISEs have been assigned the same DSSI node
IDs in both KFQSA configuration tables.
13. Boot one node and note the device names reported by VMS.
14, Shut down the node and boot the other one. Note the device names to

ascertain that both systems see the same set of ISE device names.

CAUTION: Make sure that the device name of each ISE is identical on
both nodes. Failure to do so can result in a partitioned cluster, and
consequently data corruption.

Setting the ISE Allocation Class
This section describes how to change the ISE allocation class. In multi-host
configurations you must assign the same nonzero allocation class to both
host systems and all connected ISEs. The ISEs ship with the allocation
class set to zero.

Change the allocation class by using the following procedure.
1.

Determine the correct allocation class according to the rules on
clustering.
NOTE: In a multi-host configuration, the same allocation class must be
assigned to both systems and to all connected ISEs. This allocation class
must be different from that of other systems or of hierarchical storage
controllers (HSCs) in a cluster.

At the console prompt (>>>), type SET HOST/DUP/UQSSP/DISK
# PARAMS, where # is the DSSI node ID of the ISE to which the
allocation class is to be set.

At the PARAMS> prompt, type SHOW ALLCLASS to check the
current allocation class.
The system responds with the following display.
Parameter

ALLCLASS

Current

Default

Type

Radix

Byte

Dec

PARAMS>

Type SET ALLCLASS #, where # is the allocation class you want to
set the ISE to.

KFQSA/M7769

EXAMPLE: SET ALLCLASS 2 sets the allocation class to 2.

Type SHOW ALLCLASS to check the new allocation class.
The system responds with the following display.
Parameter
-

Current
L

ALLCLASS

Default

Type

Radix
o

Byte

Dec

PARAMS>

Type WRITE. The system responds with:
Changes

require

contreller

initialization,

ok?

[Y/

Type Y to save the new allocation class value.

Repeat steps 3 through 8 for each ISE on the DSSI bus.

(N)]

KZQSA/M5976

KZQSA Storage Adapter
The KZQSA (M5976) storage adapter controls the TLZ04, TSZ07, and RRDseries devices on the Q22-bus.
Ordering Information
KZQSA-SA
KZQSA--SF

Factory installed
Field installed

Functional Information
Adapter protocol

TMSCP

Supported drive

TLZO04:; two external cables or two

Controllers per system

drives

Performance Information

Peak transfer rate
Error Detection

4 Mbytes synchronous
Q-bus parity

Configuration Information
Form factor

Quad height

Related Docomentation
EK-KZQSA-IN Manual

KZQSA Storage Adapter Installation and User

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

KZQSA

Mb976-5A

0.0

27.5

1.0

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P

KMV1A-M, -S Programmable Communications
Controller
Ordering Information
Module (M7500-PA) for BA200series enclosures
RS232-C/CCITT V.23 interface

KMV 1A-SF (field upgrade)

Module (tM7500-PB) for BA200-

KMV 1A-8G (field upgrade)

series enclosures

RS422-A/CCITT V.11 interface

Module (M7500-PC) for BA200series enclosures

KMV 1A-8H tfield upgrade)

Module (M7500) for BA23. BA123,
and H9642--]

KMV1A-M

RS423-A/CCITT V.10 interface

BA123

HY642-]

Cabinet kits

RS232-C/CCITT V.23 interface

CK-KMVI1A-AB

CR-KMV1A-AA

CK-KMV1A-AF

RS422-A/CCITT V.11 interface

CK-KMV1A-EB

CK-KMV1A-EA

CK-KMV1A-EF

RS423-A/CCITT V.10 interface

CK-KMV1A-FB

CK-KMV1A-FA

CK-KMVIA-FF

Operating System Support
MicroVMS
ULTRIX-32m

Version 4.2 and later
Version 2.2 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Revision 1.08 and later
Three LEDs

Microsystems Options

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P
Documentation
KMV11 Programmable Commumcations Controller

EK-KMV11-TM

Technical Manual

KMV11 Programmable Commumcations Controller

EK-KMV11-UG

User's Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

KMV1A-M
KMV1A-S

M7500
M7500-P

26
26

0.2
02

154
154

3.0
30

1.0
1.0

The KMV1A is a programmable data communications interface for systems

that use the Q22-bus.
features:

The quad-height KMV1A provides the following

Direct memory access (DMA) across the Q22-bus, for medium-speed
transmission and reception with minimum programming overhead

DCTI11 microprocessor executing the PDP-11 base-level instruction set

Multiprotocol serial controller chip

words of EPROM

with root firmware and

power-up self-test

diagnostics

Application mode operation, for customer-developed firmware using the
PDP-11 instruction set

32 Kbytes of RAM space, for implementation of data-link protocols

Synchronous (bit-oriented or byte-oriented) and asynchronous capabilities for application firmware

Extensive modem signal support

°*

Onboard, programmable null modem clock

Figure 1 shows the module layout for the KMV1A-M and KMV1A-S.
Figure 2 shows the KMV1A-S module with handle.

Microsystems Options

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P
Figure 1:

KMV1A Module Layout (Example)

Microsystems Options

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P
Figure 2:

KMV1A-S Module with Handle (BA200-Series)

KMV1A

M7500
PA

MLO-001082

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits.

Use the wrist

strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer svstem.

The CSR address and interrupt vector are set using two switchpacks, E29
and E13 (Figure 1). For the CSR address, use switches 1 through 9 on
switchpack E29. For the interrupt vector, use switches 1 through 7 on
switchpack E13.

Microsystems Options

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P
The CSR address for the KMV1A floats; its factory position is 17760020.
The interrupt vector floats; its factory position is 320. The following tables
list the factory configurations for the CSR and vector addresses:
KMV1A CSR Address:

17760020

(factory position)

Switchpack E29

Address Bits:
E29 Switches:
e

Al2
S9
o

All Al10 A9
S8
87
Sé
G

AB
85
D

A7
s4
O

A6
s3
O

A5
82
KD

A4
s1
e

——

CSR Address:

17760020

KMV1A

Interrupt

Vector:

320

factery

(factory position)

Switchpack E13
Vactor

El3

Bits:

Switches:

Vé

Vv4

854

Vector Address:

320

Table 1 lists the positions for switches 1 through 8 on switchpack E85
(Figure 1), which determine the interfaces: RS-423-A, RS-232-C, or RS422-A. Be sure that switches 9 and 10 on switchpack E85 remain in the
On position, to enable CCITT 107 and CCITT 112.

Table 1:

KMV1A Switchpack E85 Positions

ES58 Switch

RS-423-A/RS-232-C

RS-422-A

Switch Position

Off

off

Off

off

Microsystems Options

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P
The KMV 1A has three self-test LEDs. Switches S8 on switchpack E13, and
S10 on switchpack E29 effect self-test operation, as listed in Table 2. The
KMV1A LED codes are described in Table 3.

Table 2:

KMV1A Seli-Test Switches

E1388

E29S10

Self-Test Operation

Disabled

Off

Enabled (factory position, start via CSR command or at power-up,
for one pass)

off

Off

Self-test manual start for continuous loop

Off

Extended self-test start for continuous loop

Table 3:

KMV1A LED Codes

Red

Yellow

Green'

Description

Off

Self-test started. (Should remain 1in this state for 10
seconds f test 1s enabled. and indefinitely if test is
disabled »

off

Self-test in process.

Off

Successful self-test.

Off

Unsuccessful self-test

'When vou set the module self-test switch for continuous loop, the green LED cycles on and
off (10 seconds for a normal self-test and 0.05 second for an extended self-test).

Figure 3 shows the internal cabling for the KMV1A-M.

Microsystems Options

KMV1A-M/M7500
KMV1A-S/M7500-P
Figure 3:

KMV1A--M Internal Cabling

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002
KWV11-8/M4002--PA

KWV11-C, -S Programmable Real-Time Clock
Ordering Information
Module (M4002! for BA23,

Kwvi-C

Module (M4002-PA) for
BA200-series
Cabinet kit (BA23)
Cabinet kit (BA123)

KWV11-8A (factory installed)
KWV11-SF
CK-KWVIC-KA
CK-KWV1C-KC

UDIP parts

See Table 2 of this section.

BA123, and H9642-)

Operating System Support
DSM-11
MicroVMS

Version 3.3 and later
‘ersion 4.4 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

RSX-11M

Version 4 3 and later

RSX-11M--PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

VMS

Version 5.0 and later, using VAXlab
Software Library

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Montitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 1.08 (release 108) and later
See module documentation.

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002
KWV11-S/M4002-PA
Documentation
AXVI-C/KWVIL-C User's Guide
Universal Data Interface Panel
Reference Card

EK-AXVAB-UG
EK-UDIPD-RC

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

KWV11-C
KWV11-§

M4002
M4002-PA

2.2
2.2

0.13
0.13

11.2
11.2

1.0
1.0

1.0
0.3

The KWV11 is a programmable real-time clock.
You can program the
KWV11 to count from one to five crystal-controlled frequencies.
The
frequencies can come either from an external frequency or event or from a
50 or 60 Hz line frequency on the Q-bus.

The KWV11 can either generate interrupts or it can synchronize the
processor to external events. The KWV11-C module (M4002) is shown in
Figure 1; module M4002-PA has the same module layout as the M4002, and

contains an attached BA200-series bulkhead handle to connect to external
devices.

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002
KWV11-5/M4002—-PA

KWV11-C Module Layout (M4002)

] 14

£ [0
o] s
[N}

CLK STi
OVFL OUT

Figure 1:

[

—_

[

ON
‘SW3

TTTIIIE

Jore

® ST1LVLADJ

O ST

SW2

SW1

SW21g Wy

BRGnBananmnany) .
I
MLO -001084

The KWV11 has two Schmitt triggers that have three possible functions:

Start the clock

Serve as an external trigger for other modules (such as the ADV11-D
or AAV11-D)

Generate interrupts

A clock overflow can also serve as an external trigger to other modules.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002

KWV11-S/M4002-PA
Use switchpacks SW1 and SW2 on the KWV 11 (Figure 1) to set the CSR
address and interrupt vector. The CSR is fixed for the first KWV11, and
floats for secondary units. All vectors float. The following tables list the
factory configurations for the CSR address and interrupt vector:
KWV1l

CSR Address:

Switchpacks

SW1l

17770420

(factory position)

and SW2

Switches:

2
SW2

[

(=]

SWl--wmo e >

11310

Switchpack:

pet

Addr..s Bits:

CSR Address:
17770420
1

=o0on,

KWVll

= off

Interrupt

Vector:

440

(factory

position)

Interrupt

V7?7

SW2Z

[=]

Switchpack SW2

Swatches:

Address:

440

300

Vector

=o0n,

= off

The two Schmitt triggers condition the input waveforms to a form the
user needs.
You can adjust both to trigger at any level in the 212 V
range (or at TTL fixed levels) and on either the positive or negative slope
of the input signal. Switchpack SW3 consists of three switches and a
potentiometer for each Schmitt trigger (Figure 1). The use of these switches
and potentiometers is shown in Figure 2.

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002
KWV11-S/M4002-PA
Figure 2:

KWV11-C/-S Slope and Reference-Level Switches

BOARD HANDLE

{

TTL REFERENCE

o
A

-0

VARIABLE REFERENCE

TN
L

;\(/33' 3
STPOT 1 U1 29)
STPOT 210 3”'

573
o

k‘é& s
|

ST LEVEL1

ST LEVEL 2

ST SLOPE 1 (J1 25)

ST SLOPE 2 (J1 271

EXTERNAL LEVEL CONTROL

J_Mg,_

EXTERNAL LEVEL CONTROL

SW3
BOARD FINGERS

MLO Q01085

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002
KWV11-S/M4002-PA
Table 1 describes the Schmitt trigger settings.

Table 1:

KWV11-C/~S Schmitt Trigger Settings

SW3
Switch
Number

Description

With this switch on and switch 2 off, 8T1 fires at a level determined by the ST1
LVL ADJ potentiometer with a range of £12 V. Switches 1 and 2 cannot be on
together.

With this switch on and switch 1 off, ST1 fires at a fixed reference level for TTL

With this switch on and switch 4 off, ST2 fires at a level determined by the ST2
LVL ADJ potentiometer within g range of £12 V. Switches 3 and 4 cannot be on

logic. The potentiometer has no effect. Switches 1 and 2 cannot be on together.

together.

With this switch on and switch 3 off, ST2 fires at a fixed reference level for TTL
logic. The potentiometer has no effect. Switches 3 and 4 cannot be on together.

When this switch 1s off, ST fires on the negative slope thigh to low transition of
the input signal. When on, ST1 fires on the pesitive slope ilow to high transition).

When this switch s off, ST2 /' res on the negative slope of the input signal. When
on, ST2 fires on the positive slope.

7,8

Not used.

To facilitate connections to the KWV11-C or KWV11-S, you can use a

universal data interface panel (UDIP). This panel provides BNC cable
connectors and push-tab barrier strips for making cabling connections. The
panel, like other universal data interface panels, is installed in a UDIPBA mounting box. Up to three panels can be installed in a mounting box.
The mounting box/panel assembly can then be installed in any standard
media mounting slot normally used for TK50, RX50, or RD50-series media
devices. The mounting box can also be mounted in a tabletop (UDIP-TA)
expansion box for use as an external connection box.

Microsystems Options

KWV11-C/M4002
KWV11-S/M4002-PA
The KWV11 UDIP Components are listed in Table 2.
Table 2:

KWV11 UDIP Components

Module

Enclosure

KWV11-S
KWV11-C
KWV11-C
KWV1i-C

Front

Mounting

Tabletop

Other

BA200-series
BA123

UDIP-KB
UDIP-KA

UDIP-BA
UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA
None

None
None

BA123 with

UDIP-KB

UDIP-BA

UDIP-TA

CK-KWV1C-KC

BA23 with

UDIP-KB

UDIP-BA

UDIP--TA

CK-KWV1C-KA

media slot
tabletop

tabletop

Panel

Box

Items

Microsystems Options

LPV11/M8027

LPV11/LP25 and LPV11/LP26 Printer Subsystems
(LP25 and LP26 Printers)
Ordering Information
LPV11-8A (factory installed)
Module (M8027-PA) for BA200LPV11-8F (field installed)
series
LPVIVLP26
Module (M8027) for BA23, BA123, LPV11/LP25
and H9642—)

Printer system

LPV11-B

LPV11-F

Printer

LP25-BA
BC27A-30
LPV11-00

LP26-EB
BC27A-30
LPV11-00

BA23

BA123

H9642-J

CK-LPViIA-KA
BC0O5L-1C

CK-LPVIA-KB
-

CK-LPV1A-KF
-

Type-A filter connector

70-20398-00

70-20398--00

53-cm (21-int cable

BC051.~1K

90-cm (36-1n) cable

BC051-03

10-m (30-ft) cable
LPV11 controller

Cabinet kit
38-cm (15-in) catble

Operating System Support
DSM-11
Micro/RSTS

Version 3.3 and later
Version 2.2 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS
RSTS/E

RT-11

Version 4.2 and later
Version 9.5 and later
Version 5.40) and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 2.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 1.06 (release 106) and later
None

Microsystems Options

LPV11/MB8027

Documentation
EK-OLP11-TM
EK-LPV11-OP

LPI1V/L.A11 Line Printer Manual
LPV11 User’s Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

Power

Bus Loads

Module

+5V

Watts

LPV11

M8027

4.0
8.0

1.4
18

MB8027-PA

1.6

Insert
A

LPV11-8

Option

(Amps)

NOTE: Use cabinet kits CK-LPV1A-KA and -KB with a part revision of Bl
or higher only.

Use cabinet kit CK-LPVIA-KF with a part revision of Al

or higher only. The packing slip included wtith the cabinet kit contains the
revision number.

(Make sure the 70-20398 connectors are at part revision

D1 or later. A label on the bottom of the module contains the part number

for the connector.)

Microsystems Options

LPV11/M8027

The LPV11 module controls the flow of data between the Q22-bus and a line
printer. Figure 1 shows the M8027 module. Figure 2 shows the M8027-PA
module, which consists of two LPV11 modules and an attached bulkhead
handle.

Figure 1:

LPV11 Module Layout (M8027)

Wiz

wi1

\mz W10

=oV2

V5 oN\TI0 vE
V6 o (0 V6

&0 vg

vg ot

wig “ g,
O
F-

wé

(

J+0

——o>

A3 -0
w4

P
C

]

NOTE: 0 = WIRE-WRAP PIN.

=0 A4

ABo=

A5
AB=0

A?Sflm A7
o-a8-0

o~ AQw0
oA100

oAll0
oA120

MLO-001086

Microsystems Options

LPV11/M8027
Figure 2:

LPV11-SA Module Layout (M8027-PA)

—
S

bzl

"‘—.'1

N et Y e

-A2

A12

-A2

LPBO

LPAO

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when vou
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

LPV11/M8027

You set the CSR address and interrupt vector of the LPV11 by using
jumpers.

On the M8027 module, use jumpers W2, W3, and W4 to set the CSR

address, and use jumpers W9 through W14 and jumper V7 to set the
interrupt vector (Figure 1).
e

On the M8027-PA module, use the LPAO jumpers to set the CSR

address and interrupt vector for the first LPV11; use the LPB0 jumpers
to set the CSR address and interrupt vector for the second LPV11
(Figure 2).
The CSR addresses and interrupt vectors are fixed. The following tables
list the factory configurations for a first and second LPV11.
LPV1l CSR Addreas:

Address Bits:

17777514

Al2

(factory position)

All A10 A9

Jumpers :

CSR Address:

17777514

17764004

M8027 module:

0 =

MB027-PA module:

installed,
1

LPV1l

Interrupt

= removed

0 = bottom and center post
= top and

Vector:

200

(factory position)

Vector Bits:

vsS

Jumpers:

Wl4 V7

W13

W12

W1l W10

200

170

installed,

Vector

center post

Address:

M8027 module:

MB027-PA module:

= removed

= bottom and center post

= top and

center post

Microsystems Options

LPV11/M8027
Figure 3 shows the LPV11 internal cabling.
Figure 3:

LPV11 Internal Cabling

INSTALL W1 FOR PRINTERS WITH DAVFU OPERATI
ONS
INSTALL W2 FOR PRINTERS REQUIRING NEGATI
VE STROBE (LA180).

MLO-001088

Microsystems Options

MRV11-D/M8578

MRV11-D PROM Memory Module
The MRV11-D is a fusible, lhuigh-density, dual-size PROM memory module The module contains 41 jumper posts, 2 switch packs, and 16 28-pin
memory-chip sockets. The module can use a variety of user ROM chips:
masked ROMs, fusible ink ROMs, and ultraviolet erasable PROMs (UV
EPROMs) are acceptable to use. The MRV11-D accepts several memorychip densities, up to and including 32K by 8, with 16 32K devices. The
modules total memory capacity can be 512K bytes.
Ordering Information
MRV11-D Universal PROM Module
Ethernet Server Kit

MB8578
ZNAO7-CM, CP, or Cb

Operating System Support
Built-in diagnestics
IBQO01 MicroVAX Disgnostic Monitor (MDM)

Yes
3 error-free passes

Diagnostic Support

none

Documentation
MRV11-D Universal PROM Module
Field Maintenance Print Set

EK-MRV1D-UG
MP-00566

MDM Users Guide

AA-FM7AB-DN

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+12V

Watts

Ingert

MRV11l-D

M8578

1.6

0.0

8.0

3.0

0.5

—_

MRV11-D/MB578
Standard Addresses
Recommended page mode:
Window 0 is addressed between 17773000 and 17773776
Window 1 is addressed between 17765000 and 17765776
PCR address is fixed at location 1777520

Page mode PCR is configured between 17777000 and 1777036.

Terminal address used by console ODT addresses:
16-bit addressing = 1775660 - 177566
18-bit addressing = 777560 - 777566
22-bit addressing = 1777560 - 1777566
Detailed technical information is beyond the scope of this manual. For
more complete information, refer to the specific options manuals. For the
locations of jumpers and switches see Figure 1.

PROM Sizes and Pinouts
The MRV11-D contains 16 24-pin sockets to house the various PROMs and
static RAM devices that can be used in the module. The sockets can house
2K by 8, 4K by 8, 8K by 8, and 32K by 8 PROMs. In addition, the bottom

half of the socket array (chip sets 0 through 3) can accommodate static
RAM. The 2K by 8 and 4K by 8 PROMs contain 24 pins while the others
contain 28 pins.

MRV11-D/M8578

Figure 1:

MRV11-D (M8578) Jumper and Switch Locations
F

{

POWER JUMPERS

“l

e
~N

aty

L L]

.
=

N .‘fl

Wi
o n;r]

ROM/RAM
SELECTION
JUMPERS
L

| ENABLE BOOTSTRAP
JUMPER

~le

3%
[T~ DEVICE $1ZE JUMPERS
"

—— | STANDARD DECODER
e - PATTERN SELECT

s
[

M
a
! il

wob

D/ _ PCR ADDRESS SWITCHES

wll.
~

ADDRESS MODE &

JUMPERS

oSYSTEM SiZE JUMPER
G.

READ TIMING

JUMPER

nn
i

~
)

&30

€38

xE37

r i

Allelial
Y2
w’ Lw_j e

L.J

MRV11-D(M8578)

| sTarTING ADDRESS
[ SWITCHES
A

e L L] | gatTERY BACKUP
fion n |

BEnonmnn M~
IR

x£39

w111

[L n

SHUNT
0.

ZT
T DATO JUMPER

|L b L|
Ou— )13

¥ O J12

Oe— Ji}
Ow— J10
MLO-003582

MRV11-D/M8578

Table 1:

Storage Capacity per ROM Chip Size and Number of
Chips
Capacity (Kbytes)

Number of

MIM

2K by 8

4Kby8

BEby8

16Ebys

32Kby8

128

192

128

256

160

320

192

. 884

112

224

448

128

266

512

Table 2:

Typlcal EPROMSs

UV PROMs

Chip Array
Si

Maximum Memory
Array Size

Intel 2716

2K by 8

32 Kbytes

Intel 2732

4K by 8

64 Kbytes

Intel 2764

8K by 8

128 Kbytes

Intel 27128

16K by 8

2566 Kbytes

MRV11-D/M8578

Table 2 (Cont.):
UV PROMs

Typical EPROMs
Chip Array

Maximum Memory

Size

Array Size

Mostek MK3700

8K by 8

128 Kbytes

NCR 23128

16K by 8

256 Kbytes

NEC 23256

32K by 8

512 Kbytes

National 52364

8K by 8

128 Kbytes

Signetics 23128

16K by 8

256 Kbytes

Synertek 2365

8K by 8

128 Kbytes

Synertek 2365A

8K by 8

128 Kbytes

Synertek 2316B

2K by 8

32 Kbytes

Synertek 2333

4K by 8

64 Kbytes

Masked PROMs

RA60

RAG60 Disk Drive
The RA60 disk drive is supported in the H9642—J cabinet only. Order both
the RA60 disk drive and cables and the interconnect cable when installing
the RA60 option.

Ordering Information
RAG60 disk drive and cables (120 V, 240 V)
Interconnect cable with connector block

RAGO-AF
BC26-V6

Operating System Support

DSM-11
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
MicroVMS
RSX-11M
RSX-11M-PLUS
ULTRIX-11
ULTRIX-32m

VAXELN

Version 3.3 and later
Version 2.2 and later
Version 4.0 and later
Version 4.2 and later
Version 4.3 and later
Version 4.0 and later
Version 3.1 and later
Version 1.2 and later
Version 2.1 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Revision 1.06 and later
None

Microsystems Options

RAGO

Documentation
RA60 Disk Drive Service Manual
RAG60 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORAGBO-8V
EK-ORA60-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Option
KDA50-Q

Power

Bus Loads

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

7164,

13.5

679

3.0

M7165

The RAG60 is a high-capacity. removable disk drive with 205 Mbytes
of formatted storage space (Figure 1).
The RAB0 uses microprocessorcontrolled diagnostics and a 170-bit error correction code t ECC) to ensure
data reliability. The RAG0 operates with the KDAS0Q controller set.

Figure 1:

RAG0 Disk Drive

Microsystems Options

RAG0

The RA60/RA81 cabling is shown in Figure 2. The BC26V-6 cable includes a
connector block for connecting RAB0 cables. The connector block is mounted
on the bracket at the lower rear of the cabinet (Figure 2).

Figure 2:

RAG60/RA81 Cabling, H3642—J Cabinet

DRIVE LOCATED IN THE

TOP 10.5 in MASS

STORAGE AREA

Q LOCATED IN
KDAS0
C EXPANSION
THE BA23

7164

ENCLOSURE

.nl ‘ l 3

flll’fifi

M7165

T DRIVE 1
QOCCUPIED 5LOTS
LOCATED ON THE

SLOT J

H3490 1/0 PANEL

—

SLOTF

fvm!

]

ADDIMONAL
DRIVES)

LL—~—DR|VE 3

|—

DRIVE LOCATED IN

BOTTOM 10.5 in MASS
STORAGE AREA

RAgtH®

A
LEFT AND RIGHT 1.0
17
~———
[
TED
LOCA
BULKHEADS

ON THE BRACKET,

BOTTOM REAR OF THE

SYSTEM

—

(

|
e
|
i

I
|

|
-

[}

il—37 0 —
}

o Al

FACTORY CONFIGURATION PORT 0. IN THIS CONFIGURATION THE
PORT A SWITCHES ON BOTH DRIVES MUST BE DEPRESSED.

«+ PORT O CORRESPONDS TO PORT A FOR THE PRIMARY CPU
PORT 1

CORRESPONDS TO PORT B FOR AN EXTERNAL CPU
My 00070

Microsystems Options

RAG0

RAGO Fan Filter
The fan filter is an RA60 field replaceable unit (FRU). Remove the RA60
fan filter as follows:

Remove the RA60 from the cabinet according to the procedures in the
FRU section of H9642—J Cabinet Maintenance.

Remove the six screws that hold the RA60 bezel in place. The bezel is
shown in Figure 3.
Disconnect P401 from the RA60 front panel module.
Pivot the bezel so the cover catch retainer clears the cross brace.
Remove the bezel.

Remove the fan filter assembly by sliding it forward (Figure 3).

Microsystems Options

RAG60

Removing the RA60 Fan Filter

-z

”

S
A

Figure 3:

—

7
P

HLTEHCLAMP
S

gEzEL

ABSOLUTE

AR FILTER

MLO-001071

Microsystems Options

RA70

RA70 Disk Drive
Ordering Information
RA70-AF

RA70 drive kit

Operating System Support
ULTRIX-32m
VMS

Version 2.2 and later
Version 4.6a and later

Diagnostic Support
Version 2.11 (release 121) and later

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Two LEDs

Documentation
RAT0 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA70-5V

DC Power and Bus Loads

Power

Option

Module

+5V

KDA50-Q

M7164

6.93

KDA50-Q

M7165

6.57

+12V

Bus Loads

Watts

Insert

34.6

3.0

(2)B

33.21

Microsystems Options

RA70
The RA70 is a full-height, 13.1-cm (5.25-in) fixed-disk drive, with a storage
capacity of 280 Mbytes. The RA70 drive has four connectors, shown in
Figure 1.

Figure 1:

RA70 Connectors

o|®

Ole

I.l:g_gjr

JE==)

pe=—
*’
=T

POWER

TO REMOTE

(SDI)

CONNECTOR

OPERATOR PANEL

PORTB

(SDH)

PORTA
MLO-001672

The RA70 drive also has Ready and Fault indicators on the drive itself
(Figure 2), but they are not visible because the RA70 is mounted with the
front facing the inside of the mass storage area. The indicators on the
operator console panel duplicate the indicators on the drive.

All RA70 indicators normally light on the operator control panel (OCP)
when power is applied to the drive, while the drive is performing internal
start-up diagnostics. This indicator should go out within 15 seconds. If any
indicator remains on, or lights at any time other than during the first 15
seconds after start-up, the drive has detected a drive fault.

If the drive has detected a fault, you can press the fault indicator button
to get a flashing error code from all six of the indicators on the operator
console panel.
If no fault is found, you can use the fault indicator button as a lamp tester.

Microsystems Options

RAT70

Figure 2:

RA70 Switches

FAULT
INDICATOR

SELECT ACCEPT

{RED)

SWITCH

EELLFLELE

N
N

X
\

UNIT SELECT
SWITCHES

(DIP SWITCHES)

MLO-001073

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29~26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

The RA70 contains a Unit Select/Accept switch and a Unit Select DIP
switch, both shown in Figure 2. Neither of these switches is accessible
once the RA70 is installed, so you must set the Unit Select DIP switch to
the correct setting before installing the drive. The Unit Select DIP switch
sets the unit number by which the drive is known to the host system. It is
an 8-bit binary switch, with switch 1 as the least significant bit (LSB).

WARNING: The RA70 is heavy (4.72 kg; 10.4 lb). Be prepared for the weight
when handling the drive.

Microsystems Options

RAT70

Set the unit number using the following DIP switches:
Drive

Number

DIP

Switch

Setting

switch

on)

87654321

000000O0OO0

00000O0O01

00000010

00000011

The Unit Select/Accept switch is used to notify a drive that the unit number
has been changed, while the system is operating. Because the RA70 drive
is mounted facing the rear of the system, this switch is inaccessible during
system operation and is not used.

Figure 3 shows the cabling for RA70s in a dual-cabinet configuration where

two processors share RA70s.

Figure 3:

RA70 Dual-Cabinet Cabling

MAIN ENCLOSURE

AUXILIARY ENCLOSURE

TVoo

| okt RAT0

—

-1—-[-‘-”--1

I
]

BULKHEAD

FRONT

KDAS0

MODULE SET

~ZA] R

RAT0

T TTTTT T E

1 2 I

FRONT

BULKHEAD

[

EI-——

- :3:::i
[

E:“‘
L11

KDASO

MODULE SET

TWO INTERNAL
RA70 DRIVES,

ONE OR TWO EXTERNAL DRIVES.

[

|
!

!
i
!

INCLUDES CABLES FOR DUAL PORTING
INTERNAL DRIVES TO ANOTHEHR SYSTEM.

!
|

sg|

Microsystems Options

|
|

wmp

Tmm

wme

RA70

RA70 Diagnostics
If an RA70 drive detects a fault at power-up, the Fault indicator lights.
and the drive remains off line. At that point, you can press the Fault
indicator, and the six indicator lights on the operator console panel flash a
hexadecimal error code, in a range from 00 to 3F. The RA70 Service Guide
describes each code. Figure 4 shows the indicators that form the hex display
listed in the table. The lights indicate the following FRUs:
Hex Code

Indicator

Most Probable FRU

000000

None

011111

Head disk assembly (HDA!

111111

All others

System power supply
Electronic control module (ECM)

Figure 4:

Operator Console Panel Indicators

RUN

FAULT

READY

WRITE PROTECT

PORT A

PORT
B

6
MLO~-000499

RA70 Error Logs
When a fault occurs, error codes are generated and stored in the host error
log (if it is enabled), and the RA70 internal drive error log. The host error
log captures four generic status bytes (including an error byte) and eight
extended status bytes (including a drive state and error code byte). These
bytes are described in detail in the RA70 Disk Drive Service Manual.
The RA70 internal drive error log also captures the error log byte. RA-series

internal drive error logs are invoked through the Field Service version of
the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM), as follows:

From the MDM Main Menu, select 4: Display the Service Menu.

Select 3: Display the Device Menu.

Select the KDA50: Q-bus SDI disk controller.

Microsystems Options

RA70

Display the Device Utilities Menu.

Select 3: Drive Internal Error Log Utility.

The format of the Internal Drive Error Log is shown in Example 1.
Example 1:

RA70 Internal Drive Error Log Format

Entry Entry Err Brr

Saek

Mfqg

Drive Specific Hex Data

Drive Err

Loetn

Count

Typ

Code

Count

Code

Byte

Mesasage

(D)

(A)

(H)

(D)

(H)

453122

452446

FF FB

inc.lhd.sek.

452446

FF FB

exp.sek.tmr.

drv.sys.ini.

0-9,

right

left

(H)

(A)
wrgkoff.trk.

451699

7A BB exp.onl.atn.

451616

45161¢€

00 00 09 00 0C Q0 00 00 40 CO drv.pwr.rat.

191

Byte

STS

drv.sye.ini.
pasaed.test.

The ten bytes of drive-specific hex data printed by the internal error log
are divided by the RA70 into the following six data fields:
¢

Logic processor number of minutes

Servo processor destination cylinder

Servo processor destination logical head number

Servo processor physical state number

Logic processor logical state bit flags

Logic processor fault number

Two possible occurrences are displayed in the Error Type and Error Code
columns: events and errors.

An error has an Error Type such as DE and an Error Code consisting of a
nonzero value, as shown in the first three lines in the sample log above.
An event has a blank Error Type and an Error Code of 00, as shown in the
last five lines in the sample log above.

Microsystems Options

RA70
The error codes in the Error Code column of the internal error log are
described in the RA70 Disk Drive Service Manual. The most probable
causes of errors to the field replaceable units (FRUs) are listed in Table 1.

NOTE: The RA70 is not an FRU. The FRUs are the Electronic Control

Module (ECM) and the Head Disk Assembly (HDA).

RA70 Error Codes

Code

ECM

HDA

33
34
39

3C
41

43
44

e
b
b

et et
pd
e
et
b

[ )

el bl

27
31

1F
20

bt bt

Cable

et pmd

Ctrl.

ek v

eead

Most Probable Cause

Error

Table 1:

Microsystems Options

RA70

RA70 Error Codes

Error

Most Probable Cause

Code

ECM

I
T T

Table 1 (Cont.):

4E
4F
50
51

60
62

67
85
86

87
88
89

8B
8C

8D
94

96
C6

Cirl.

HDA

CcD

—

EO-EF

Microsystems Options

Cable

RA70

Table 2 'ists part numbers for RA70 drive hardware for BA200-series
enclosures.

Tablie 2:

RA70 Part Numbers

Description

Part No.

Cable, RA70 to signal distribution board

17-00847-06

RA70 ECM

70-22494-01

RA70 HDA

70-21946-01

RA70 operator contral panel (OCP)

54-17232-01

RA70 shoe plate

70-22474-01

RA70 shock mount top (attach to drive)

74-24559-02

RA70 shock mount bottom (attach to drive)

74-24559-01

RA70 shock mount top {attach to enclosure)

70-23997-05

RA70 shock mount bottom (attach to enclosure)

70-23997-06

Screws for RA70 drive shides (4)

90-10155-00

Electronic Control Module (ECM)
The electronic control module is an RA70 field replaceable unmit (FRU).
Remove ‘he ECM from the RA70 drive as follows.
WARNING: The RA70 is much heavier (4.72 kg; 10.4 1b) than other 13.1-cm
(5.25-in) drives. Be prepared for the extra weight when handling the drive.
CAUTION: Disk drives are susceptible to electrostatic damage.
Do not
handle the RA70 disk drive unless you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap
that is properly grounded to the enclosure frame. Use the Antistatic Kit
(29--26246). When you have removed the drive, place it on the antistatic
mat.

Microsystems Options

RA70
Refer to Figure 5 as you use the following procedure:
1.

Remove the RA70 drive from the BA200-series enclosure, using the
procedure in the FRU section of the appropriate enclosure maintenance
documentation.

Remove the RA70 side slides.
Using a medium-sized Phillips screwdriver, carefully remove the four
screws that secure the shoe plate to the mounting assembly. Removing
the shoe plate exposes the ECM and the four quarter-inch nuts that
secure the ECM.
Use a quarter-inch nut driver to remove the nut at each corner of the
ECM assembly.
Remove the ECM by carefully pulling it away from the HDA. Because of
the length of the connector pins, you may need to rock the ECM slightly
to free the ECM assembly from the connectors on the HDA.
CAUTION: The ECM is a two-module set. Do not take the module assembly
itself apart.

Microsystems Options

RA70

Figure 5:

RA70 Components

SHOCK

ISOLATQOR

GROMMET \

i
CHASSIS
-

SCREW

~—~ GROMMET
BUSHING

SCREW

\\FORSHOE
PLATE

ATTACHMENT

TOP

COVER HDA

NE¥DULE
S

T~ BASEPLATE
CORNER
P05TS

SHOE
PLATE
b

MODULE

RETENTION
KEP NUT

MLO-~001074

Microsystems Option..

RA70

Preparing the ECM for Return
You must use a special conductive container to ship a defective module
assembly to a repair depot. Attach the wrist strap from the Antistatic Kit
(29-26246) to the conductive container before placing the faulty FRU inside
the container (Figure 6). The container itself is conductive and 1s therefore
grounded to the surface on which it 1s placed.

After placing the ECM in the container, secure the snaps on the front of

the container. The FRU is now ready for shipment.

Microsystems Options

RA70

Figure 6:

RA70 Conductive Container

CLOSED
CONDUCTIVE
CONTAINER

"’2/*. -~

GROUND

STRAP

OPEN
CONDUCTIVE
CONTAINER

Y\/i )

MLO-001075

Microsystems Options

RA70
Replacing the ECM
NOTE:

Use the Antistatic Kit (29-2624€) when handling the ECM.

Replace the four quarter-inch nuts and finger tighten. Using the quarterinch nut driver, tighten each nut one-quarter or one-half turn, as needed.

Head Disk Assembly (HDA)
The head disk assembly (HDA) is an RA70 FRU. Remove the ECM from
the HDA and the RA70 chassis. See the procedure under Electronic Control
Module (ECM).

NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the HDA from the chassis.

The

chassis is part of the head disk assembly FRU.
Before installing the new HDA, remove the shunt terminator attached to
the bottom of the new HDA and install it on the old HDA.
Preparing the HDA for Return

You must use a special corrugated box with a foam rubber cushion for
shipment. The normal procedure 1s to unpack the new HDA and to return
the defective HDA in the same container.

It is not necessary to wear an antistatic wrist strap when packing an HDA
for return shipment. If the HDA is defective, however, you must first place
the defective unit in a plastic bag sealed with desiccant foam from the

replacement HDA. You must then place the plastic bag in the contoured
cutout of the foam rubber cushion, inside the corrugated box. You can then
seal the box for return shipment.

Microsystems Options

RA81

RA81 Disk Drive
The RAS81 disk drive is supported in an H9642—J cabinet only. When
installing a new RA81 option, order both the drive and the interconnect
cable.
Ordering Information
RAB81 disk drive (120 V)
RAS1 disk drive (240 V)
Interconnect cable with connector block

RAB1-HA
RA81-HD
BC26V-6

Operating System Support
DSM-11
Micro/RSTS

Version 3.3 and later
Version 2.2 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4.2 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4 3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5.4D and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.2 and later

VAXELN

Version 1.1 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnos’ ic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 1.06 irelease 106} and later
None

Microsystems Options

RA81

Documentation
RAB1 Disk Drive Service Guide
RA81 Mgk Drive User Guide

ER-ORA81-5V

EK-ORA81-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current
(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

Watts

Insert

KDAS0-Q
KDA50-Q

M7164
M7165

6.93
8.57

34.6
33.21

3.0
-

0.5
-

(2)B
-

The RA81 (Figure 1) is a high-capacity, fixed-disk drive with 456 Mbytes
The RA81 uses microprocessor-controlled
of formatted storage space.
diagnostics and a 170-bit error correction code (ECC) to ensure data
reliability. The RA81 operates with the KDA50-Q controller set.
The BC26V-6 cable includes a connector block for connecting RA81 cables.
The connector block is mounted on the bracket at the lower rear of the

cabinet. (See the RA60/RA81 cabling figure in the RAG0 section.)

Microsystems Options

RA81

Flgure 1:

RAB81 Disk Drive

MLO-001076

RA81 Fan Filter
The fan filter is an RAS81 fieid replaceable unit (FRU). Remove the RA81
fan filter as described below.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

RA81
1.

Remove the RA81 drive according to the FRU procedures in the H9642J Cabinet Maintenance.

Push down on the RA81 door latch (Figure 2) and lower th: door to a
horizontal position.

Pull down on the top half of the fan filter, then lift it out of the RA81
drive.

Figure 2:

Removing the RA81 Fan Filter

L. OPERATOR
CONTROL

PANEL

MLO 001077

Microsystems Options

RA82

RAB82 Disk Drive
When installing a new RAS82 option, order both the drive and the
interconnect cable.

Ordering Information
RAS82 disk drive (120 V)

RABS2-HA

Interconnect cable with connector block

BC26V-6

RA82-HD

RABS2 disk drive (240 V)

Operating System Support
Micro/RSX
RSX-11M

Version 4.0 and later
Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

ULTRIX-32m

Version 4.0 and later
Version 2 2 and later

VMS

Version 4 .6a and later

Diagnostic Support

Version 2.10 (release 120) and later

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

None

Documentation
RAB2 Disk Drive Service Guide
RAB82 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORAB82-SV
EK-ORA82-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

KDA50-Q
KDA50-Q

M7164
M7165

6.93
6.57

0
0.03

346
3321

3.0
-

05
-

(2)B
-

Microsystems Options

RAB2

The RA82 is a high-capacity, 35-cm (14-in) fixed disk drive with 622 Mbytes
of formatted storage space. The RA82 uses the KDA50-Q controller set.

The BC26V-6 cable is attached to a connector block for connecting RA82
cables. The connector block is mounted on the bracket at the lower rear of
the cabinet.

Microsystems Options

RAS0

RA90 Disk Drive
The RA90 disk drive is supported in the H9644 cabinet only.
Ordering Information
RAS0 drive kit

RA90-MA (factory installed)
RA90-NA (field upgrade)

Operating System Support
ULTRIX-32m
VMS

Version 2.2 and later
Version 4.6a and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version 3.01 (release 126) and later
One test LED

Decumentation
RA90 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORAS0-SV

RA90 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA90-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+I2V

Watts

Insert

KDA50-Q
KDA50-Q

M7164
MT7165

6.93
6.57

0
0.03

34.6
33.21

3.0
-

0.5
-

Microsystems Options

RAS0

The RAS0 is a high-density, fixed-media disk drive that uses thin-film media
and thin-film heads. The RA90 heads, disks, rotary actuator, and filtering
system are encased in the head disk assembly (HDA). The unformatted
capacity of the RA90 is 1.6 gigabytes, and the formatted capacity is 1.2
gigabytes distributed over 7 platters with 14 surfaces. The average seek
time of the RA90 is 17.5 msec, or 19.0 msec with subsystem overhead.

The RAS0, shown in Figure 1, operates in the H9644 cabinet through the
KDA50-Q controller set, which is installed in the BA213 chassis. Both
external and internal standard disk interface (SDI) cables connect to the
I/O bulkhead located at the base of the rear of the H9644.
Figure 1:

RA90 Disk Drive

)

Microsystems Options

RA90

Operator Control Panel
The RA90 disk drive operator control panel (OCP), shown in Figure 2,
supports the following operator functions:
¢

Selects and displays the unit address number

Selects Run, Write Protect, Port A, and Port B

Displays faults and error codes

Selects tests in the test mode

Controls the microcode update process

Communicates with the RA90 master processor

The OCP contains six input switches, seven LED indicators, a fourcharacter alphanumeric display, and a microcode update port. The logical
state of the switches changes each time you select an OCP switch. The
switch state appears in the alphanumeric display. For example, if you
select the Run switch, an R appears in the OCP display.
Figure 2:

RA90 Operator Control Panel (OCP)

FOUR-CHARACTER
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY

UNIT NUMBER

RAS0

!
L

~READY
S

Aun

FAGLY

WA TE
T PROTECY

STATE LED

INDICATORS

RUN’

vdg

SWITCH

FAULT

SWITCH

WRITE PROTECT
SWITCH

PORT A PORTB

SWITCH SWITCH

TEST

SWITCH
ML

DOYRBO

Microsystems Options

RASO
Drive-Resident Diagnostics
The drive-resident diagnostics run at power-up or reset of the master
processor and test the following:

Hardware (CPU, ROM, RAM, SCI, and TIMER)

Logic (processor board, servo board, and PCM board)

Functions (guardband detect, seek/timing, and read/write)

The drive-resident diagnostics are invoked under four conditions:
e

Power-up or master processor reset

External init (SDI initialization command)

OCP test mode selection

Functional firmware sequences (idle loop)

Successful completion of the hardware tests is indicated by a series of OCP
displays, as follows:
¢

Blank (1 second).

WAIT (16 seconds).

0000 (If programmed, the drive unit number is displayed. Otherwise,
zeros are displayed.)

If the ¥Fault LED on the OCP lights, or if no OCP activity occurs during
the power-up resident diagnostics, enter the fault display mode by selecting
the Fault switch. The OCP then displays a three-character fault code in
the format E 00, where 00 is a two-digit fault code. Table 1 lists the error
codes and actions to take. See the RA90 Disk Drive Service Manual for
additional information on drive troubleshooting.

Microsystems Qptions

RA9C

Table 1:
Error

RA90 OCP Error Codes

Code

Description

OF or
6F

Drive write-protected

22 or
2D

Drive or power suppiy
over-temperature condition

Action

Disable write protection by setting the OCP

write-protect switch, or turn off software write
protection.

Spin down and remove power from the drive.
Make sure the front filter is clean and the room
temperature is within 18C to 24 C (644 F to
75.2 F).

Acceptance Testing
After the power-up tests complete successfully, you must run the following
acceptance tests from the OCP in this order:
1.

Test T 00: Drive spun down.

Test T 00: Drive spun up.

Run the acceptance tests from the OCP as follows. (Refer to Figure 3.)
1.

Power up the drive.

Select the Test switch.

Select the Write Protect switch to initiate the diagnostic mode.

Select the diagnostic to run by using Port A and Port B switches
(Figure 3).
Start the test by selecting the Write Protect switch.
Stop the test by selecting the Port A switch.

Reinitiate the tests by selecting the Write Protect switch again. Select
the Test switch to exit and test mode.

After the acceptance tests complete successfully, the OCP displays an R and
lights the Ready and Run indicators.

Microsystems Options

RA90
Figure 3:

RA90 Resident Diagnostic Test Selection

‘NORMAL MCDE '

DISPLAY = | R

SELECT PORT A

SWITCH (MSB

BEGINS FLASHING)

SELECT PORT

SWITCHES TO

Y -

DISPLAY = § 71

DESELECT
PORTS(S)
¥

INCREMENT

NUMBERS 0-9

DISPLAY = | &

BY SELECTING
PORT B

SWITCH

SELECT TEST
SWITCH (TEST

SELECT WRITE

LED LIGHTS)

PROTECT SWITCH

{TEST STARTS;

\
SELECT WRITE

PROTECT
SWITCH
ROTECT
SWITC

DISPLAY

oisPiAy
- | s

\
0

SELECT POAT A
SWITCH (LSD

DISPLAY = | ¢

DISPLAY
= | T

o | +

AR,

| sTaRT

Y o | + | compLeTE)
Li

BEGINS FLASHING,

DISPLAY= | T

DIAG CAN BE

BY
AESTARTED
W P
SELECTING
OREX!TED BY

SELECTING

INCREMENT

TEST SWITCH

NUMBERS 0-9

BY SELECTING
PORT B

SWITCH

* INDICATES FLASHING READQUT

Microsystems Options

MG OGR!

RA92 ISE

RA92 ISE
& Gbytes of formatted storage space. The

VAX 4000 Model 300 supports the RAS2 onlyin separate storage expansion
enclosures.
Storage Capacity
User capacity
User capacity (blocks)

1.5 Gbytes
2,940,952 Gbytes

Ordering Information

RA92-CA/CD

RA92 disk drive (120 V @ 60 Hz; 240 V & 50 Hz)

BC26J-XX/25/50/80

12-, 25-, 50-, or 80-foot interconnect cable

BC27V-XX/25/60/80

12-, 16-, 26-, 3b-, 50-, or 80-foot interconnect cable

Performance
Average seek time

16.56 mulliseconds

Single track seek

3.0 milhseconds

Peak transfer rate

22.2 Mbits/second

Physical Specifications

Height

26.47 cm (10.42 in)

Depth
Weight

60.96 cm (24.0 in)
31.8 kg (70 1b)

Width

23.0 cm (8.76 in)

Configuration Information
Form fector

10.5-in high

RAS2 ISE

Related Documentation

EK-ORAS0-UG
EK-ORAS0-SV

RAS0/RA92 User Guide
RASO/RA92 Service Manual

EK-ORAS0-PS

RASO/RA92 Pocket Service Gude

EK-ORAS0-TD
EK-ORAS)-IP

RASO/RA92 Technical Description
RA90 [llustrated Parts Breakdown

RC25

RC25 Disk Subsystem
Ordering Information
120V

240V

RQC25-AA

RQC25-AB

Removable cartridge

RC25K-DC

KLESI module

M7740

Internal cable

70-18652~00

70--18652-00

17-00445-03

RC25-AA

RC25-AB

RC25 disk drive subsystem

RC25 disk drive

Type-A filtered connector

External cable
RC25 tabletop unit

Operating System Support
DSM-11
Micro/RSTS

Version 3.3 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4. 1m and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.9 and later

RT-11

Versien 5.4D and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later

Version 2.2 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDp

Version 1.05 (release 108) and later

Version 2.1 (release 134): XRCFC0.0BJ,
ZRCDBO.BIN

Power-up self-test LEDs

None

Microsystems Options

RC25

Documentation
RC25 Disk Subsystem Pocket

EK-ORC25-PS

Service Guide
RC25 Disk Subsystem User Guide

EK-ORC25-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Option

Module

+5V

KLESI

M7740

3.0

RC25

Power

Bus Loads

Watts

Insert

15.0
35.0

2.3

1.0

The RC25 is a mass storage disk subsystem with a storage capacity of 52
Mbytes. Figure 1 shows the RC25 as a standalone subsystem. You can also
install the RC25 in an H9642—J enclosure. The RC25 has two 20-cm (8-in),
double-sided disks, each with a capacity of 26 Mbytes. One disk is fixed
and one is removable. Both disks are mounted on and driven by the same
spindle.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts ofa computer system.

Microsystems Options

RC25

Figure 1: RC25 Disk Subsystem

ADAPTER
MODULE

'[M.croVAx H SYSTEM

INTERFACE

CABLE

MLO 001078

Microsysterns Options

RC25
The RC25 uses a KLESI (M7740) adapter module. Use DIP switchpack E58
on the KLESI to set the CSR address (Figure 2). The CSR address factory
configuration, and an address for a second KLESI module, follow Figure 2.
The interrupt vector is set under program control.
NOTE: The KLESI and RQDX controller are both MSCP devices. The first
MSCP device in a system is assigned a CSR address of 17772150. If you
install more than one MSCP device in the same system, you must set the
CSR address of the second device within the floating range.
Figure 2;

KLES] Modiile Layout (M7740)

SWi1
.

SW10
®

cso ARARTRRNH) [{

]

MLO~-001079

Microsystems Options

RC25

KLESI

(M7740)

CSR Address

Switchpack ES58

Address Bits:

Al2

All A10 A9

ES58 Switches

--~--------- > Jumper

CSR Address:

17772150

0
1

1
0

1
1

Possible addresses for a second MSCP device:

17760334
17760354

0
0

1
1

= switch on;

0 = switch off

0 = jumper on left and center pin (module edge facing you)
1 = jumper on right and center pin

Microsystems Options

RD31/RD32

RD31 and RD32 Diskette Drives
Ordering Information
RD31 disk drive kit
RD32 disk drive kit

RD31-AA
RD32-AA

RD31 or RD32 disk drive

RD31-EA or RD32-EA

Extension power cable

17-01389-01

20-pin cable (30 cm; 12 in)

17-00282-01

34-pin signal cable

17-00286-00

Stacking bracket

74-33598-01

Operating System Support
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

Version 4.0 and later
Version 2.2 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 54D and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

Diagnostic Support
Power-up self-test LEDs

None

Documentation
RD31-A Disk Drive Technical Description
RD32 Fixed Disk Drive Technical Description

EK-RD31A-TD
EK-ORD32-TD

RD31/32 Fixed Disk Drive Option Installation
Guide

EK-RD3XA-IN

Microsystems Options

RD31/RD32

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

RD31
RD32

0.9
0.9

0.9
0.6

38.8
33.0

Insert

The RD31/32, shown in Figure 1, is a 13.3-cm (5.25-in), half-height, fixeddisk drive with the following formatted storage capacities:
RD31: 20 Mbytes
RD32: 42 Mbytes

The RD31/32 is a random access drive that uses nonremovable hard disks.
The drive is mounted in mass storage port 0 of the BA23 enclosure and
interfaces with the Q22-bus through the RQDX3 controller module. You
can install a second RD31/32 on top of the first drive. See the RD31/32
Fixed Disk Drive Option Installation Guide for procedures to install two
drives in mass storage port 0.

Microsystems Options

RD31/RD32

Figure 1:

RD31/32 Fixed-Disk Drive

RD32

RESISTOR
TERMINATOR
PACK LOCATION

J3-4 PIN —
POWER

CONNECTOR
s-3amn T

CONNECTOR

"RD31
RESISTOR
TERMINATOR

PACK LOCATION

J2-20 PIN CONNECTOR

OOO@OQC@
QADIAL

WRITE
g?aqlb
D%? i
FAULT

RECOVERY

MODE

J7-16 PIN CONNECTOR
iDRIVE

CONFIGURATION)

DS3

LIFE

TEST

SHOWN WITH DRIVE CONFIGURED AS DS1

MELO-(N0B0

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistaiic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Microsystems Options

RD31/RD32
Configure the drive by installing jumpers on the drive electronics board,
shown in Figure 1. Install a jumper on one of the drive selects: DS1, D52,
DS3, or DS4 (Table 1).

Table 1:

RD31/32 Drive Select Jumper Connections
Drive Select

Drive

1234

Connector

1000

15 to 16

0100

0010

13 to 14
11 to 12

0001

9to 10

1 = jumper in; 0 = jumper out

Table 2 lists the functions of pins 1 through 8; for the Normal mode, do not
install jumpers on these pins.

Ia'tzle 2:

‘B_Q31/R032 Device Electronics Board, Pins 1-8

Configuration

Jumper Location

Jumper In

Lafe test

7108

Factory use only

Write iault

Bto6

Latched

Recovery mode

Jto4d

Factory use only

Radical

1102

Radical mode

The RD31/32 drives used in most systems have the resistor terminator pack
installed, as shown in Figure 1. For specific exceptions, refer to the system
installation procedure.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

RD50-Series Disk Drives
a;dering Information
BA23 or H9642-J

BA123

BA200-Series

RD51A-AA
RD52A-AA
RD53A-AA
RD54A-AA

RD51A-BA
RD52A-BA
RD53A-BA
RD54A-BA

RD53E-SF
RD54E-SF

20-pin

17-00282-00

17-00282-01

17-00282-03

34-pin

17-00286-00

17-00286-01

17-00286-03

RD51T kat

RD52 kit

RD53 kit
RD54 kit

Disk kit cables:

Operating System Support
DsM-11

Verston 3.3 and later

Micro/RSTS

Version 2.2 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4.1m and later. (RD51 may be used as a data device
only.

RSX~11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5.41) and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later.
only)

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

(RD51 may be used as a data device

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic
Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Version

1.02 (release 102) and later (RD54:

Version

1.14

Microsystems Options

(release 114) and later;
None

RD50 Series

Documentation
RD51-D, -R Fixed Disk Drive Subsystem

EK-LEP02-OM

Owner's Manual

RD52-D, -R Fixed Disk Drive Subsystem

EK-LEP04-OM

Owner’s Manual

RDB3-1, -R Fixed Disk Drive Subsystem

EK-LEP06-OM

Owner's Manual

11C23-UC/11C23-UE RD52 Upgrade

EK-RD52U-IN

Installation Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5YV

+12V

Watts

Insert

RD32
RDA1

=
:

09
10

06
16

13.0

242

1.0

35.0

RD53

0.9

2.5

34.5

RID54

1.54

23.7

RDS4A-EA

1.34

226

RD52

The RD50-series are fixed disk drives with the following storage capacities:
RD51--11 Mbytes

RD53—71 Mbytes

RD52--31 Mbytes

RD54—150 Mbytes

RD50-series drives have jumpers or switches that determine which driveselect lines the drive responds to.
The following sections describe
the jumpers and switches on each model. along with the removal and
replacement procedures for the field replaceable units (FRUs).
If you use an RD50-series drive as a single fixed-disk drive in a BA23 or
BA200-series enclosure, you should have the drive respond to drive-select
line 3 (DS3). This setting makes the drive number for that unit RDO.

If you use RD50-series drives in a BA123 enclosure, you must install one
of the drive-select jumpers or press one of the drive-select switches down.
If you use the factory configuration for the M9058 module, you can use any
one of the drive-select jumpers or switches since the M9058 determines the
drive number.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series
You must format an RD50 drive when you add it to the system.
The
formatting utility is available in the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)
and the XXDP V2 Diagnostic Monitor.

RN51 Read/Write Board
The RD51 read/write board has a DIP shunt jumper to select the drive

number. The jumper has seven breakable metal strips. Figure 1 shows the
jumper setting to select drive number RDO (drive-select line DS3).
RD51 Disk Drive and Shunt Jumper

T IU
TEY

9
210

;

(M0
O

CH
o

[

-1

12
13

214
15
16

[

N W

B O~

REAR OF DRIVE

—

Figure 1:

NOT USED

FRONT OF DRIVE

G as

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series
The read/write board is the only part of an RD51 drive that you can replace.
Replace the RD51 read/write board as follows:

CAUTION: Disk drives are susceptible to electrostatic damage.

Do not

handle the RD51 disk drive unless you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap
that is properly grounded to the enclosure frame. Use the Antistatic Kit (29~
26246). When you have removed the drive, place it on the antistatic mat.

Remove the RD51 disk drive from the enclosure, using the procedure
in the FRU section of the appropriate enclosure maintenance
documentation.
Remove the fou: Phillips screws on the skid plate (Figure 2). Set the

skid plate aside.

CAUTION: Do not touch the RD51 exposed head positioner flag on the
front right side. Doing so can cause the head positioner flag to rotate,
resulting in damage to the drive.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Figure 2:

Removing the RD51 Skid Plate

MLO--00 1082

Using a 3/32-inch Allen wrench, remove the four screws that hold the
read/write board to the RD51 drive (Figure 3).

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series
Figure 3:

Removing the RD51 Read/Write Board Screws

Refer to Figure 4 for steps 4 through 6.
4.

Disconnect connectors P6, P7, and P8 from the front of the read/write

board.
5.

Disconnect the P4 2-wire connector on the rear of the read/write board,
next to the dc power connector.

Remove the read/write board.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Figure 4:

Removing the RD51 Read/Write Board

MO 00084

Make sure the jumper configuration of the 14-pin DIP shunt pack

matches Figure 1.

NOTE: You do not need to format an RD51 drive when you replace only the
read /write board.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

RD52 Main Printed Circuit Board
The RD52 main printed circuit board has five pairs of pins (Figure 5) used
to select the drive number. To select drive number RDO, place a jumper on
pins DS3. To select drive number RD1, place a jumper on pins DS4.

Figure 5:

RDS52 Disk Drive and Shunt Jumper

FRONT OF DRIVE

MLO

-001085

You can replace the main printed circuit board (MPCB) only on RD52 disk
drives that have the part number 30-21721-02.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series
Remove ihe RD52 disk drive MPCB as follows:
CAUTION: sk drives are suscentible to electrostatic deamage.

Do not

handle the RD5% disk drive unless you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap
that is properly grounded to the enclosure frame. Use the Antistatic Kit (29~
26246). When you have removed the drive, place it on the antistatic mat.

Remove the RD52 disk drive from the enclosure, using the procedure
in the appropriate enclosure maintenance documentation.

Remove the four Phillips screws that hold the slide plate and ground

clip to the drive (Figure 6). Set the slide plate aside.

Figure 6:

Removing the RD52 Slide Plate Screws

MULG-001086

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

3. Unplug the 2-pin connector (Figure 7).
4.

‘

Remove the two Phillips screws that hold the front cover to the drive
(Figure 7).

Figure 7:

Removing the RD52 Front Cover Screws

MLO-001087

The front cover has pop fasteners. Remove the front cover by pulling it
away from the drive (Figure 8).

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Figure 8:

Removing the RD52 Front Cover

MLO-001088

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series
6.

Remove the three Phillips screws from the heatsink, grounding strip,
and the corner opposite the heatsink (Figure 9).

Figure 9:

Removing the RD52 MPBD Screws

MLO--001088

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

7. Lift the MPCB straight up until it clears the RD52 frame; this step
disconnects P4, a 12-pin plug (Figure 10).

Disconnect P5, a 10-pin connector (Figure 10).

Figure 10:

Removing the RD52 MPCB

MLO-0010%0

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

RD53 Device Electronics Board
The RD53 device electronics board has four switches on the rear edge to
select the drive number. To select drive number RDO. press switch 83
(Figure 11). To select drive number RD1, press switch 54.
Figure 11:

RD53 Drive Select Switches

[+]

«]

]

S2|

ON{ON

$ [ON e | ¢

ML 00109

The device electronics board is the only part of an RD53 drive that you can
replace. Remove the RD53 device electronics board as follows:

CAUTION: Disk drives are susceptible to electrostatic damage.

Do not

handle the RD53 disk drive unless you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap

that is properly grounded to the enclosure frame. Use the Antistatic Kit (29~

26246). When you have removed the drive, place it on the antistatic mat.

CAUTION: Handle any fixed-disk drive with care; dropping or bumping the

drive can damage the disk surface.

Remove the RD53 drive from the enclosure, using the procedure in the

appropriate enclosure maintenance documentation.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Remove the four Phillips screws that hold the slide plate and ground
clip to the RD53 drive. Set the plate aside.

Loosen the two captive screws that hold the device electronics board in
place.

The board pivots in hinge slots at the front of the drive.

Without

straining any of the connectors or cables, carefully lift the device
electronics board (Figure 12). Tilt the board back until it rests against

the outer frame.
CAUTION: Flextble circuit material is fragile.

Handle the device

electronics board carefully to avoid damage.
Figure 12:

Lifting the RD53 Device Electronics Board

RD50 Series
5.

On the read/write board, disconnect connector J8 (to the motor control
board) and connector J9 (to the preamplifier board). Both connectors

and cables are fragile; handle them with care.
6.

Lift the device electronics board out of the hinge slots.

RD54 Device Electronics Board
The RD54 device electronics board has six pins to select the drive number
(Figure 13). The pins are labeled 1 through 6 or 4 C 3 2 C 1. Both
versions are electronically equivalent. To select drive number DUAJQ, install
a jumper connecting pins 2 and 3 or pins C and 2.
CAUTION: On the RQDX3 controller, the two W23 jumpers should connect
pins 1 and 2 and pins 3 and 4. Otherwise, loss of format will occur.

PACK

4C32C1

MEO-(01093

RESISTOR

TER~MI-NAT.OR

RSeDr5ie0s

RD50 Series

CAUTION: Handle any fixed disk drive with care; dropping or bumping the

drive can damage the disk surface.
1.

Remove the four Phillips screws that hold the skid plate to the drive
(Figure 14). Set the skid plate aside.

Figure 14:

Removing the RD54 Skid Plate

NUT AND
THREADED

4 SCREWS
MLO -00 1084

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Disconnect the green ground wire from the J4 connector.

Remuve the four Phillips screws that hold the small bracket to the drive.
There are two screws on each side of the bracket. Set the bracket aside.

Using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench, turn the nut on the threaded stud

Remove the four Phillips screws that hold the PCBA to the drive. Two
of these screws have captive lock washers; note their location.

Refer to Figure 15 for steps 2 through 6.

Carefully remove the three connectors at the front of the drive.

until the stud is free of the casting.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Figure 15:

RD54 PCBA, View of Component Side

NUT AND

THREADED

STUD

SCREWS HOLDING

SMALL BRACKET

COMPONENT
SIDE PCRA

THREE

CONNECTORS
SMALL

SRR

BRACKET

SCREWS WITH

CAPTIVE
LOCK WASHER

ML -00109%

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

7. Gently slide the PCBA as far as it will go in the direction shown in
Figure 16.

Figure 16:

Sliding the RD54 PCBA

MLO 001096

8. Swing the board up as shown in Figure 17. You may have to pull
the bracket back slightly; do not pull the bracket back more than is

necessary to remove the board. Do not flex the PCBA when removing
it

Microsystems Options

RL 50U Series

Figure 17: Removing the RD54 PCBA

T
ML OG1Og

Remove the remaining connector on the side of the PCBA. Place the
PCBA aside.

10. Do not remove the paper insulator.

Microsystems Options

RD50 Series

Installation
Install the PCBA as follows:
1.

Make sure the paper insulator is in place.

Reconnect the last connector you removed on the side of the PCBA

during the removal procedure.

Place the edge of the PCBA against the bracket, as shown in Figure 17.
Lay the PCBA flat against the paper insulator.
Reconnect the other three conrectors to the PCBA.

Replace the four screws that hold the PCBA to the drive. Make sure
the two screws with captive washers are in the correct location.
Place the threaded stud over the hole in the casting.

Using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench, turn the nut on the threaded stud
counterclockwise at least one-half turn. This step aligns the threads
and prevents them from being stripped.

Tighten the threaded stud by turning the nut clockwise.

Replace the small bracket.

10. Reconnect the green ground wire.
11. Replace the skid plate.

Microsystems Options

RF30

RF30 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)
The RF30 integrated storage element (ISE) is supported in BA200-senes
enclosures only. An ISE is an intelligent storage device that handles device
operations internally rather than through a disk controller.
Ordering Information
RF30-SA (factory installed)
RF30-5F (field upgrade)

RF30 ISE

Operating System Support
ULTRIX-32m

Version 3.0 and later

VAXELN

Version 3.2 and later

VMS

Version 5.0-2A and later

Diagnostic Support
Version 2.3 (release 124) and later

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Documentation
EK-RF30D-UG

RF30 Integrated Storage Element
User’s Guide
RF30 Integrated Storage Element
Installation Manual

EK-RF30D-IM

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current (Amps)

Option

Module

+5V

RF30-5

1.25

+12V

Bus Loads

Power

Watts

17.7

RF30

The RF30 is a half-height, 13.3-cm (5.25-in), fixed-disk integrated storage
element (ISE), with a storage capacity of 150 Mbytes and a maximum data
transfer rate of about 1.5 Mbits per second. Figure 1 shows the RF30 ISE in
its installation position for BA200-series enclosures, with shides attached.

7
=

ETA

RF30 ISE with Attached Slides

Figure 1:

M) 001098

RF30

The RF30 ISE is based on the DIGITAL Storage System Interconnect
(DSSI) architecture. DSSI supports up to seven storage devices, daisychained to the host system through either the KA640 CPU or a host adapter
board such as the KFQSA module. You can install the RF30 with other
DSSI drives.

The device controller is built into the RF30; it is not a separate module.
This feature enables many drive functions to be handled without requiring
adapters or intervention by the host system, resulting in improved I/O
performance and throughput rates.
CAUTION: Handle the RF30 ISE with care. Dropping or bumping the RF30
can damage the disk surface.
DSSI node ID switches are located on the electronics controller module, at
the connector end of the RF30 (Figure 2). Set these switches to assign a

unique node ID number to each drive on the DSSI bus.
Figure 2:

RF30 ID Switches and LEDs

]
[T

CONNECTOR END
OF DRIVE

FACING

DOWN

—

EEE 0l0

imaezion 8

DSSI NODE

FAULT
LED

READY
LED

IDSWITCHES

(RED:

iGREEN;

RF30 ISEs are factory configured to the same unit ID. When installing an
additional or replacement RF30, make sure the unit ID plug on the operator
control panel (OCP) and the unit ID DIP switch on the RF30 are set to the
same value. Although the OCP umnit ID plugs override the RF30 unit ID
DIP switch, it is good practice to set them to the same value. Doing so
eliminates the possibility of creating a duplicate unit ID if you disconnect
the OCP from the drives and fail to set the DIP switches to the correct
value.

Microsystems Options

RF30

Table 1 shows the KF30 switch settings for up to seven DSSI nodes.

Table 1:

RF30 Switch Settings
Switch'

DSSI

Node ID

1(MSB)

3 (LSsB)

Down

1
2

Down
Down

Down
Up

Up
Down

Down

4
5

Up
Up

Down
Down

Down
Up

Down

'Up = toward the head disk assembly (HDA), Down = toward the drive module

ZNormally reserved for the host adapter

The RF30 ISE contains two LED indicators (Figure 2):
¢

The Ready indicator displays the activity status of the drive.
On power-up, the Ready indicator lights and the power-up diagnostics
run. After the diagnostics complete successfully, the Ready indicator
goes out. The Ready indicator lights again when the media heads are
on the requested cylinder and the drive is read/write ready.

The Fault indicator displays the fault status of the drive.

On power-up, the Fault indicator lights and the power-up diagnostics
run. After the diagnostics complete successfully, the indicator goes out.
The Fault indicator lights again if a read/write error or a drive error
condition is detected.
See the RF30 Integrated Storage Element Installation Manual for a
description of drive-resident diagnostics and error codes.

Microsystems Options

RF31E ISE

RF31E ISE (Disk Drive)
The RF31E is a DSSI integrated storage element (ISE) that provides 381
Mbytes of formatted storage space.
Storage Capacity
Data storage capacity

381 Mbytes, formatted

Ordering Information
RF31E-AF

381 M byte half-height DSSI ISE

Performance
Average seek time

14.7 milliseconds

Average access time

23.0 milliseconds

Peak transfer rate

4.0 Mbytes/second

Physical Specifications
Height

4.40 can (1.75 i)

Width

14.60 cm (5.75 in)

Depth
Weight

20.45 cm (8.25 in)
1.81 kg (4.0 Ib)

Configuration Information
Form factor

Standard 5.25-inch footprint

Power requirements

+5Vdc,1.0A
+12 Vde, 2.80

Power consumption

86w

Related Documentation

EE-RFT2D-UG

RF31V/RF72 User Guide

ER-RF72D-IM

RF3VRF72 Installation Manual

RF31F ISE

RF31F ISE (Disk Drive)
The RF31F is a DSSI integrated storage element (ISE) that provides 200
Mbytes of formatted storage space.
Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

200 Mbytee, formatted

Ordering Information
RF31F-EA

200 Mbyte half-height DSSI ISE

Performance
Average seek time

12.3 milliseconds

Average access time
Peak transfer rate
Transfer rate from the media

20.6 milliseconds
4.0 Mbytes/second
2.0 Mbytes/second

Physical Specifications
Height
Width

4.40 cm (1.75 in)
14.60 cm (5.75 in)

Weight

1.81 kg (4.0 Ib)

Depth

20.45 cm (8.25 in)

Configuration Information
Form factor

Standard 5.25-inch footprint

Date surfaces

Bits per inch

30,064

Tracks per inch

1,875
+5 Vde, 1.3 A

Power requirements

412 Vdc, 1.1 A (seeking)

Power consumption

19.7W

RF31F ISE

Related Documentation
EK-RF72D-UG-004
EK--RF72D-IM-002

RF3VRF72 User Guide
RF3VRF72 Installation Manual

RF31T

RF31T integrated Storage Element (ISE)
The RF31T is a full height, DSSI integrated storage element (ISE) that

provides 381 Mbytes of formatted storage space on a 3.5-inch fixed disk.

Storage Capacity
Data storage capacity

381 Mbytes, formatted

Orde.ing Information
RF31T-AA

Factory-installed into a BA400-series enclosure

RF31T-AF

Field-installed into a BA400-series enclosure

RF31U-AF

Field upgraded to an RF312 into a BA400-scries
enclosure

RF31T-SA

Factory-installed into a BA200-series enclosure

RF31T-SF

Field-installed into a BA200-series enclosure

RF31U-AF

Upgrade kit for expansion of RF31V-AA/AF to 381
Mbytes including cables. Field installed only, for
installation in BA400-series enclosure

RF31T-8A

Factory-installed fixed disk ISE with DSSI
interface, installed in BA200-series enclosures

RF31T-SF

Field-installed fixed disk ISE with DSSI interface,
installed in BA200-series enclosures

Performance
Average seek time

7.5 milliseconds

Average access time

13.06 milliseconds

Peak transfer rate

4.0 Mbytes/second

Physical Specifications
Height

4.08 cm (1.63 in)

Width

10 ¢m (4.00 in)

Depth

14.38 cm (5.75 in)

Weight

86 kg (1.91b)

Configuration Information
Form factor

Standard 3.5-inch footprint

Power requirements

+5Vde,

171 A

+12 Ve, 086 A
Power consumption

137 W

Related Documentation

RF Series Integrated Storage Element

EK-RF72D-IM

Installation in BA200 Series Enclosures

RF Series Integrated Storage Element

EK-RFSIS-PS

Pocket Service Guide

RF Series Integrated Storage Element User
Guide

EK-RF72D-UG

BA400 Storage Devices Installation

EK-BA44A—-IN

Procedure

RF36E

RF36E Integrated Storage Element
The RF36E is a 3.5-inch, fixed-disk integrated storage element (ISE) that provides

1.6 gigabytes of storage space for DSSI-based systems.

Ordering Information

RF36E ISE for BA4xx-based systems or
expanders (factory installed)
RF36E ISE for BAdxx-based systems or
expanders (field installed)

RF36E-AA

RF36E ISE for BA2xx-based systems or

RF36E-SA

RF36E-AF

expanders (factory installed)
RF36E ISE for BA2xx-based systems or
expanders (field installed)

RF36E-SF

Upgrade kit for capacity expansion of

RF36U-AF

RF36E-AA/AF (field installed)
Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

1.6 gigabytes, formatted

Performance

Average seek time

9.7 milliseconds

Average access time

15.3 milliseconds

Peak transfer rate

6.25 megabytes/second

Physical Specifications

Height

4.1 cm (1.62 1n)

Width

10.16 cm (4.0 1n)

Depth

14.6 cm (5.75 in)

Weight

0.86 kg (1.87 1b)

Configuration Information

Form factor

Standard 3.5-inch footprint

RF36E

Power Requirements
+5 Vde, 0.86 A (maximum)

+12 Vdc, 2.89 A (peak) first 3

seconds of spin-up
+12 Vdc, 0.69 A (maximum) idle
+12 Vdc, 0.96 A (maximum

average) continuous random
seeks
+12 Vde, 1.70 A (maximum peak)

continuous random seeks
Power consumption

11.5 W (typical) idle
14.9 W (typical) continuous
random seeks

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.5-2 and later

Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-test (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.
See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Version 137A and later

Retfated Documentation

RF Series Integrated Storage Element
Installation in BA200 Series Enclosures
RF Series Integrated Storage Element
Pocket Service Guide

EK~-RF72D-IM

RF Series Integrated Storage Ele.aent User
Guide

EK-RF72D-UG

BA400 Storage Devices Instaliation
Procedure

EK-BA44A~IN

ER-RFSIS-PS

RF36E

Jumpers

The RF36E has three jumpers for specifying the DSSI node ID number. Table 1
lists the jumper positions, and Figure 1 shows their location.
Note

When the ISE is connected to an operator control panel (OCP), the
jumpers are ignored. Instead, the DSSI node ID number is determined by
the DSSI node ID plug on the OCP.

Table 1

DSSI Node ID Jumper Positions

DSSI Node 1D

Jumper 2

Jumper 1

Jumper 0

Out

Ouc

QOut

Out

Jumperin = 1
Jumper out =
DSS] address 7is typically assigned to the host adapter.

RF36E

indicators

The RF36E has two LEDs to indicate the drive status. Table 2 lists the LED
status indicators, and Figure 1 shows their location on the drive.
See the device documentation for a description of the indicators that reside on the
OCP.
Table 2

RF36E LED Iindications

LED

Description

Indication

Green

Ready

When ON, indicates that power is applied to
the ISE, and the heads are on cylinder.
When FLASHING, indicates that the ISE is
active.

When OFF, indicates that power is not applied
to the ISE.
Amber

Fault

When ON, indicates that a fault condition exists in the ISE. See the device documentation
for user action.

When OFF, indicates the normal operating
condition.

Figure 1

RF36E LED and Jumper Locations
£

. JT

Fault
LED

‘{ ‘ :

—

/U |Z_:_...... ]

Ready -~

l \\ ~

(Green)

01 2

LED

Remote Panel Connector

DSS! Node 1D Jumper Pins
MLO-010869

RF362

. RF362 Dual Integrated Storage Element
The RF362 is a dual RFF36 integrated storage element (ISE) that provides 3.2
gigabytes of storage space for DSSI-based systems.

Ordering Information

Dual RF36 ISE for BAd4xx-based systems or
expanders (factory installed)
Dual RF36 ISE for BA4xx-based systems or

RF362-AA

RF362-AF

expanders (field installed)
Upgrade kit for capacity expansion of

RF36U-AF

RF36E—-AA/AF (field installed)
Three RF362 ISEs, factory installed in a

DIL-RF36A-A6

BA4xx expander box

Six RF362 ISEs, factory installed in a BA4xx

DL-RF36A-AB

expander box
Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

3.2 gigabytes, formatted

Performance

(per drive)

Average seek time
Average access time

9.7 milliseconds
15.3 milliseconds

Peak transfer rate

6.25 megabytes/second

Physical Specifications

(per drive)

Height

4.1 cm (1.62 in)

Width

10.16 cm (4.0 1n)

Depth

14.6 cm (5.75 in)

Weight

0.86 kg (1.87 1b)

Configuration Information

(per drive)

Form factor

Standard 3.5-inch footprint

RF362

Power Requirements

(per drive)

+5 Vde, 0.86 A (maximum)

+12 Vde, 2.89 A (peak) first 3

seconds of spin-up
+12 Vdc, 0.69 A (maximum) idle
+12 Vde, 0.96 A (maximum
average) continuous random
seeks

+12 Vde, 1.70 A (maximum peak)

continuous random seeks
Power consumption

11.5 W (typical) idle

14.9 W (typical) continuous
random seeks
Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.5-2 and later

Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-test (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Version 137A and later

See the device documentation.

Related Documentation

RF Series Integrated Storage Element
Installation in BA200 Series Enclosures
RF Series Integrated Storage Element

EK-RF72D-IM

EK-RFSIS-PS

Pocket Service Guide

RF Series Integrated Storage Element User
Guide

EK-RF72D-UG

BA400 Storage Devices Installation

EK-BA44A-IN

Procedure

RF362

Jumpers

Each RF36 has three jumpers for specifying the DSSI node ID number. Table 1
lists the jumper positions, and Figure 1 shows their location.
Note

When the ISE is connected to an operator control panel (OCP), the
jumpers are ignored. Instead, the DSSI node ID number is determined by
the DSSI node ID plug on the OCP.

Table 1

DSSI Node ID Jumper Positions

DSSI Node ID

Jumper 2

Jumper 1

Jumper 0

Out

Jumper in = 1

Jumper out = 0

DSSI address 7 is typically assigned to the host adapter.

RF362

indicators

Each RF36 has two LEDs to indicate the drive status. Table 2 lists the LED
status indicators, and Figure 1 shows their location on the drive.
See the device documentation for a description of the indicators that reside on the
OCP.
Table 2

RF36 LED Indications

LED

Description

indication

Green

Ready

When ON, indicates that power is applied to
the ISE, and the heads are on cylinder.
When FLASHING, indicates that the ISE is
active.

When OFF, indicates that power is not applied
to the ISE.

Amber

Fault

When ON, indicates that a fault condition exists in the ISE. See the device documentation
for user action.
When OFF, indicates the normal operating

condition.

Figure 1

RF36 LED and Jumper Locations
i

Fault

LED

(Amber) \,;I

ReadyA

|\\ ~

(Green)

012

LED

Remote Panel Connector

DSS! Node 1D Jumper Pins
MLO-010860

RF71

RF71 integrated Storage Element (ISE)
The RF71 integrated storage element (ISE) is supported in BA200-series
enclosures only. An ISE is an intelligent storage device that handles device
operations internally rather than through a disk controller.
Ordering Information
RF71 ISE

RF71E-SA (factory installed)
RE71E-SF (field upgrade)

Operating System Support
ULTRIX-32m
VAXELN

Version 3.0 and later
Version 3.2 and later

VMS

Version 5.0-2A and later

Diagnostic Support

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 3.01 (release 126) and later

Documentation
RF71 Integrated Storage Element

EK-RF71D-UG

User’s Guide

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Bus Loads

Power

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

RF71-8

1.10

1.35

21.7

The RF71 is a full-height, 13.3-cm (5.25-in), fixed-disk integrated storage
element (ISE), with a storage capacity of 400 Mbytes and a maximum data
transfer rate of about 4.0 Mbytes per second. Figure 1 shows the RF71
ISE in its installation position for BA200-series enclosures, with slides
attached.

RF71

Figure 1:

RF71 ISE with Attached Slides

MO 001882

The RF71 ISE is based on the Digital Storage System Interconnect (DSSI)
architecture. DSSI supports up to seven storage elements, daisy-chained
to the host system through either the KA640 CPU or a host adapter board
such as the KFQSA module. You can install the RF71 with other ISEs.
The device controller is built into the RF71; it is not a separate module. This
feature enables many functions to be handled without requiring adapters
or intervention by the host system, resulting in improved I/O performance
and throughput rates.

CAUTION: Handle the RF71 ISE with care. Dropping or bumping the RF71
can damage the disk surface.

RF71

DSSI node ID switches are located on the drive module, at the connector
end of the RF71 (Figure 2). Set these switches to assign a unique node ID
number to each ISE on the DSSI bus.
Figure 2:

RF71 ID Switches and LEDs

DSSI NODE

1D SWITCHES

e
A

FAULT
LED

READY
LED

MU 0088
)

RF71 ISEs are factory configured to the same unit ID. When installing an
additional or replacement RF71, make sure the unit ID plug on the operator
control panel (OCP) and the unit ID DIP switch on the RF71 are set to the
same value. Although the OCP unit ID plugs override the RF71 unit ID
DIP switch, it is good practice to set them to the same value. Doing so
eliminates the possibility of creating a duplicate unit ID by disconnecting
the OCP from the drives and failing to set the DIP switches to the correct
value.

Table 1 shows the RF71 switch settings for up to seven DSSI nodes.

Microsystems Options

RF71

Table 1: RF71 Switch Settings

Switch!

DSSI
Node ID

i(MSB)

3 (LSB)

Down

1
2

Down
Down

Down
Up

Up
Down

Down

1Up = toward the head disk assembly (HDA); Down = toward the drive module
2Normally reserved for the host adapter

The RF71 ISE contains two LED indicators (Figure 2):
*

The Ready indicator displays the activity status of the drive.

On power-up, the Ready indicator lights and the power-up diagnostics

run. After the diagnostics complete successfully, the Ready indicator
goes out. The Ready indicator lights again when the media heads are

on the requested cylinder and the drive is read/write ready.
¢

The Fault indicator displays the fault status of the drive.
On power-up, the Fault indicator lights and the power-up diagnostics
run. After the diagnostics complete successfully, the indicator goes out.
The Fault indicator lights again if 2 read/write error or a drive error
condition is detected.

See the RF71 Integrated Storage Element User’s Guide for a description of
drive-resident diagnostics and error codes.

‘

RF72 ISE

RF72 Integrated Storage Element
The RF72 ISE provides 1 Gbyte of formatted storage space, or 1.4 Gbytes of
unformatted data storage. The RF72 supports Q-bus, MicroVAX, VAX 4000
series and DECsystem enclosures. Up to three RF72 ISEs can be installed
in the VAX 4000 series system enclosures and four if a tape drive is not
used. Expanders can contain up to seven RF72 ISEs.
Storage Capacity
User Capacity Formatted
User Capacity Unformatted

1.0 Gbytes
1.4 Gbytes

Ordering Information

RF72E-AA
RF72E-AF
RF72E-SA

Embedded (Factory installed) BA400 Series
Embedded (Field installed) BA400 Series
Embedded (Factory installed) BA200 Senes

RF72E-SF

Embedded (Field mstalled) BA200 Series

Performance
Average seek time

18.3 milliseconds

Average raw seek tirne, high speed

10.3 milligeconis

Average rotational latency
Peak transfer rate

2.0 Mbytes/second

18.6 milliseconds

Physical Specifications

Height

7.75 cm (3.05 in)

Width

14.60 cm (5.75 in)

Depth
Weight

20.75 cmo (8.17 1)
4.09 kg (9.0 Ib)

Configuration Information
Form factor

13 3.cm (5.25 in) full rack width
45 Vdc, 1.256 A/412 Vdc, 3.12 A

Power consumption, spin-up

571 W

Power consumption, geeking

279 W

RF72 ISE

Related Documentation

EK-RF72D-IM

RF3VRF72 Installation Manual for BA200

EK-RF72D-UG

RF3VRF72 User Guide

Enclosures

RF73 Integrated Storage Element (ISE)

RF73 integrated Storage Element
The RF73 is a DSSI integrated storage element (ISE) that provides 2.0
Gbytes of formatted storage space. RF-series ISEs are used in DSSI busses

(Digital Storage Systems Interconnect). An ISE is an integrated storage
element that is housed in a special mounting bracket for simplified installation and upgrading.
Storage Capacity
User capacity

2.0 Gbytes

Ordering Information
RF73E-AA
RF73E-AF

Factory-installed 2.0 Gbyte ISE
Same as —AA but is field installed

Performance
Average geek time

13.0 milliseconds

Average rotational latency

8.3 milliseconds

Peak transfer rate

4.0 Mbytes/second

Physical Specifications

Height

8.26 cm (3.25 in)

Depth

20.85 ¢m (8.21 in)

Width

Weight

14.71 cm (5.79 in)

2.89 kg (6.36 Ib)

Configuration Information
Form factor

Standard §.25-inch high footprint

Power requirements

+5 Vde, 1.26 A; +12 Vd¢, 3.12 A

Power consumption, epin-up

56.6 W

Power consumption, seeking

232 W

Related Documentation

EK-RF72D-UG

RF31/RF73 User Guide

EK-RF72D-SV

RF31/RF73 Service Guide

RF74

RF74 Integrated Storage Element
The RF74 is a 5.25-inch, fixed-disk integrated storage element (ISE) that provides
3.57 gigabytes of storage space for DSSI-based systems.

Ordering Information

RF74E ISE for BA4xx-based systems or
expanders (factory installed)
RF74E ISE for BA4xx-based systems or
expanders (field installed)

RF74E-AA

RF74E ISE for BA2xx-based systems or
expanders (factory installed)

RF74E-SA

RF74E ISE for BA2xx-based systems or
expanders (field installed)

RF74E-SF

RF74E-AF

Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

3.57 gigabytes, formatted

Performance

Average seek time
Average access time

12.5 milliseconds
18.1 milliseconds

Peak transfer rate

5.0 megabytes/second

Physical Specifications

Height

8.3 cm (3.25 1n)

Width

14.7 cm (5.79 in)

Depth

20 9 ¢cm (8.21 in)

Weight

29kg (6.4 1b)

Configuration information

Form factor

Standard 5.25-inch footprint

RF74

Power Requiremenits

+5 Vdc, 1 A (typical)
+5 Vde, 1.2 A (peak)

+12 Vdc, 2.4 A (typical) idle
+12 Vdc, 4.0 A (maximum peak)
continuous random seeks

+12 Vde, 2.9 A (maximum
average) continuous random
seeks
+12 Vde, 6.1 A (peak) at spin-up
Power consumption

35 W (typical) idle
40.8 W (typical) continuous
random seeks

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 3.5-2 and later

Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-test (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.
See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitos (MDM)

Version 137A and later

Related Documentation

RF Series Integrated Storage Element
Installation in BA200 Series Enclosures
RF Series Integrated Storage Element
Pocket Service Guide

EK-RF72D-IM

RF Series Integrated Storage Element User

EK-RF72D-UG

EK-RFSIS-PS

Guide

BA400 Storage Devices Installation
Procedure

EK-BA44A-IN

RF74

Switches
The RF74 has three switches for specifying the DSSI node ID number. Table 1
lists the switch positions, and Figure 1 shows their location. In the figure, the
DSSI node ID 1s set to 7.
Note

When the ISE is connected to an operator control panel (OCP), the
switches are ignored. Instead, the DSSI node ID number is determined
by the DSSI node ID plug on the OCP.

Table 1

DSSI Node ID Switch Settings

DSSI Node 1D

Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 3

Down

Switch positions:
On = 0 = Down (toward the module)
Off= 1 = Up (toward the HDA)

DSSI address 7 is typically assigned to the host adapter.

RF74

Indicators

The RF74 has two LEDs to indicate the drive status. Table 2 lists the LED status

indicators, and Figure 1 shows their location on the drive.
See the device documentation for a description of the indicators that reside on the
OCP.
Table 2

RF74 LED iIndications

LED/Description

Green/Ready

Amber/Fault

indlcation

The ISE was powered up less than 10

seconds ago and POST is being run.

Off

POST has completed successfully, or
there is no power applied to the ISE.

Off

The read/write heads are on cylinder.

Flickering

Off

The ISE is active.

Flashing at 5 Hz

The ISE is performing the Module

/HDA calibration test. See the device

documentation for information about
this test.

Ooff

Flashing at 10 Hz

The ISE has detected a defective OCP, or

the OCP DSSI node ID plug is missing.
See the device documentation for user
action.

ofr

A fault condition exists in the ISE. See
the device documentation for user action.

RF74

' Figure 1 RF74 Switch and Indicator Locations

DSSI Node
1D Switches

Ready

Fault

LED

(Amber)
\

MLO-010870

RQDX2/M8639-Y
RQDX3/M7555

RQDX2 and RQDX3 Disk Controllers
Ordering Information
BA23 or H9642-]

BA123

BA200-Series

RQDX2 kit

RQDX2-AA

RQDX2-BA

Module

M8639-YB

50-pin cable

BC02D-1D

17-01520-01

40-pin cable

17-00862-01

Signal distribution board

M9058

RQDX3-AA

RQDX3-BA

Module

M7555

50-pin cable

BC0o2D-1D

17-01520-01

17-00285-02

40-pin cable

17-00862--01

RQDX3 kit

Signal distribution board

M7555

M9058

Operating System Support

DSM-11
Micro/RSTS

Version 3.3 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

RQDX2: Version 4.1m and later
RQDX3: Version 4.2 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 54D and later

Version 2.2 and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Diagnostic Support

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Power-up self-test LEDs

RQDX2: All versions and releases
RQDX3: Version 106 (release 106)
and later
RQDX2: 4 LEDs
RQDKX3: 1 LED. ¢+On indicates correct
operation )

Microsystems Options

[

RQDX2/M8639-Y
RQDX3/M7555

Documentation
RQDX2Z Controller Module User’s Guide
RQDX3 Controller Module User's Guide

EK-RQDX2-1'G
EK-RQDX3-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

RQDX2
RQDX3

M&639-YB
M7555

6.4
248

0.1
0.06

33.2
132

2.0
1.0

1.0
1.0

NOTE: In BAI23 enclosures,

use the

17-01520-01 cable to connect the

RQDX3 to the M9048 distribution board.

In older BA123 svstems, replace

the 17-00862-01 cable with the 17-01520--01 cable.

RQDX2 and RQDX3 are intelligent controllers with onboard microprocessors, used to interface fixed-disk drives and diskette drives to the Q22-bus.
Both controllers transfer data by using direct memory access (DMA). Host
system programs communicate with the controller and drives by using the
mass storage control protocol (MSCP).
The RQDX2 and RQDX3 can control a maximum of four drives. Each fixeddisk drive and each RX33 drive counts as one drive. Each RX50 drive counts
as two drives. Figure 1 shows jumper and LED locations for the RQDX2.

Microsystems Options

RQDX2/M8639-Y
'

RQDX3/M7555
Figure 1:

RQDX2 Module Layout (M8639)

DB DY DO

MLO-001100

Microsystems Options

RQDX2/M8639-Y
RQDX3/M7555

Figure 2 shows jumper and LED locations for the RQDX3.
Figure 2:

RQDX3 Module Layout (M7555)

—

i E

RQDX3 CONTROLLER

—3

w22

M7558)

w21

o olW01
wo2je-el oo

W04 | e—o

o—o|

w23
ey

LED t_afi“ T
321

Wo6|o o

W12 W13

o o] [e o]

lo ol w14

wise

wirle of ¥

W05

wos
0f | o| Vo’

W10 :: wos

i1H

[

——

ranasacnd

MLO

00V IO

CAULTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts ofa computer svstem.
NOTE:

The RQDXZ2 does not suppart the RD54 drive.

The CSR address of the first MGCP controller is fixed. If you install a second
controller, its CSR address is floating. The following table lists the factory
configuration and other common settings for a second MSCP controller:

Microsystems Options

RQDX2/M8639-Y
RQDX3/M7555
RODX2/RODX3

CSR Address:

17772150

(factory

position)

RQDX2

Jumpers:

Al2

All Al10

RQDX3

Jumpers:

W11l

W10

Wé

Starting Address:
17772150
Possible

1
settings

for

second

controller:

17760334

17760354

17760374

installed,

removed

NOTE:
e

RQDX2: Jumpers W1 through W4 (Figure 1) are for factory test purposes

and should remain installed.
e

RQDX3: The two W23 jumpers should connect pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 for
all configurations (Figure 2). Jumpers W21 and W22 are for factory test
purposes and should remain installed, these jumpers are present on etch
revision D1 and later only.

The interrupt vector for the RQDX2 and RQDX3 controllers is set under
program control. The first controller is assigned a fixed interrupt vector of
154. If you install a second controller, its interrupt vector floats.
NOTE: RQDX2 and RQDX3 controllers are mass storage control protocol
(MSCP) devices.

The first MSCP device in a system is assigned a CSR

address of 17772150. If you install more than one MSCP device, you must set
the CSR address of the second device within the floating range. In MicroVAX
II systems, you should not install logical unit number (LUN/) jumpers W12

through W17 on RQDX3 modules or LUN jumpers O through 7 on RQDX2
modules.

Microsystems Options

RQDX2/M8639-Y
RQDX3/M7555
RQDX2 Power-Up LEDs
Figure 3 shows the RQDX2 LEDs. Table 1 hists the LED error codes.
Figure 3:

RQDX2 Module LEDs

]

/,&f:i\:\\
/

D10 D9 D8 D
LEO«<

Table 1:

RQDX2 LED Error Codes
LLEDs

Test

Start of power-up test

Off

T11 processor test

Off

T11 uimer‘counter’address generator test

Oft

Off

Q22-bus timer/counter/address generator test

Off

OFff

Serializer/deserializer test

Off

CRC generator test

Off

Hardware version test

Off

ROM checksum test

Off

RAM test

Oft

OfF

Magnostic interrupt test

Off

Shuffle oscillator test

Off

Vahd configuration test

Off

ofY

Not used

otr

Not used

Off

Not used

Off

OfY

OfT

Off

End of test

Microsystems Options

001102

RQDXE/M7513

RQDXE Expander Module
The RQDXE expander module is an option for the BA23 enclosure or the
H3642~J cabinet only.

Ordering Information

RQDXE cabinet kit

RQDXE module
RQDX2/3 to RQDXE cable

BA23

H964:2-J

RQDXE-AA
M7513-00

RQDXE-FA
M7513-00

BCO2D-0K

BCO2D-OK

RQDXE to distribution beard cable

BCoO2D-1D

BC0O2D-1D

RQDX2/3 to

70-18652-01

IO panel cable

[70 panel insert

70-2866-01

RQDXE to 2nd distribution board

BC0O2D-04

cable

f)perati‘ng Sysiem Sul;[;o}'t
DSM-11

Version 3.3 and later

Micro/RSTS

Verswon 2.2 and later

Micro/RSX

Version 4.0 and later

MicroVMS

RQDX2: Version 4. 1m and later

RSX-11M

Version 4 3 and later

RSX-11M PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5 4D and later

ULTRIX-1!

Version 3 1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later
Version 2 0 and later

VAXELN

RQDX3 Version 4.2 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Dagnostic Manitor

RQDX2: All versions and releases

Power-up s¢if-test LEDs

None

RQDX3: Version 1.06 (release 1061 and later

Microsystems Options

RQDXE/M7513

Documentation
RQDXE Expander Module User's Guide

EK-RQDXE-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

RQDXE

M7513

0.8

0.0

4.0

1.0

The RQDXE module, shown in Figure 1, connects external RD50-series or
RX50 drives to an RQDX2 or RQDX3 controller in the BA23 enclosure.
Figure 1:

RQDXE Module Layout (M7513)

M7513

|
<

q
o

2112
-

o
=

w
=

Lnd

)

=
z

~Na

E = 00000000 % [glcleslo®) 3 (ed - [eeo - [gee
o

s [esf@gloo oo
> -

zoof[@eo

- O-—m.-m-—m Q._m K

Dd«mgugoo

WwuwII

Yy W -~

——

(&0

Z2 2Za

MLO 001103

The external drives may Le tabletop (-D) or rack mount (-R) models. The
RQDXE 1s installed in the BA22 backplane, directly under the RQDX2 or
RQDX3. The RQDXE internal cabling is shown in Figure 2.

Microsystems Options

RQADXE/M7513

Figure 2:

RQDXE Internal Cabling
RQDXE AA OPTION

8C0O2D 01

[

FRONT PANEL

MOUNTING

RX50

PLATE

" SHELF B
s

N\,

R2
CABLE
ASSEMBLY | 3rr—LTT<,
17.0122301

OR 70-20691-01

133

mapxe

NN SHELF A

b_L‘

\'\‘l% \ Y

>>>

‘

(M7513)

8C020 1D

RQDXE FA OPTION

BCO2D 01

| T
1

%RONT PANEL

__J'(
|

a———

RQDX3 ‘l k
BA23 A

AX50

N
g

T
<\
=
T

wmo

—

DISTRIBUTIONY J3 \

PANEL

“\._PORT1

1N]

—
4

j’

3
(M7513),

BCO2D
1D
RD5n

_._._BCO2D-04

)

MLG-001 104

Microsystems Options

RQDXE/M7513
In an H9642-J cabinet, the RQDXE connects one RD50-series and/or one
RX50 drive in the BA23-C (bottom) enclosure to the RQDX2 or RQDX3 in
the BA23-A (top) enclosure. The RQDXE is installed in the AB rows of
the BA23 backplane, directly under the RQDX2 or RQDX3. The cabling
i1s similar to that shown in Figure 2, except hat the cable from the J3
connector on the RQDXE connects to the BA23-C distribution panel instead
of to a mounting plate in the I/0 panel.
Figure 1 shows the factory position for the jumpers.
Use the factory
configuration when the RQDXE connects to one of the following:

One external tabletop or rack mount RD drive for a BA23 system

One RD drive in the left mass storage slot of the BA23~C (bottom)
enclosure in an H9642—J system

Figure 3 shows the RQDXE jumper settings for other supported
configurations. These include RD50-series and RX50 drives in external

tabletop or rack mount enclosures, and in the BA23-C enclosure of an
H9642 system.

An external tabletop or rack mount drive has three connectors on the rear:
J1,J2, and J3. Use J1 to connect drive RD1, and J2 to connect drive RD2.

NQTE: Version Al or B1 of the RQDXE module does not support an external
drive as RDO0. You must use external drives as RD1 or RD2; install the first
fixed-disk drive in the system (RDO) in port O of the BA23-A enclosure.
An updated version of the RQDXE supports an external drive as RDO. The
new module has a part revision of C1 or C2 (on the handle). Jumper settings
are listed in an addendum to the RQDXE Expander Module User's Guide,
which is shipped with the new module.

Microsystems Options

RQDXE/M7513

Figure 3:

RQDXE Jumper Settings

EXTERNAL RACK MOUNT

OR TABLETOP
FIRST

RD1

SECOND

RD1

EXTERNAL
DRIVE

BA23C ["” T
LEFT
SLQ7

RD2

Al A2

|° x | x

RX50

EXTERNAL
DRIVE

BAZI CINHIGAL

BA23C

]

ojo

o{0

Al A2

é—a

A3 A4
BY B2

A3 A4

ojo

Bt B2

[}

olo

of{o

e (12l
oclo ol e—ea
o)

83 84

AND

WRT
PROT

C1 C2

oilel ojo

Cc3 C4

©°

D3 D4

‘o0

0|
I

E1 ED

>0 | O—0

E3 t4

ojo

Ooj0o

o©

[o]

DRV

K1 K2

[¢]

o—a

éo—a

&—@

[}

*M7513 FACTORY CONFIGURATION

[«]

X
o|lo

o©

ojlo

olo

ojoe

o|o

C3C4

0}j0

ojo0o

D3IDAIo

o—a

C1C2
DY

cjo

PROT

SEL F3 F4 I I I olo o] o—=b
H3 HA4 Ol | O I II []
ACK 1 k3 ka oIIIo—o o—o
EX L3 L4 I I I I I I o
PORT
=9
¥
o
M1 M2
SEL
M4 s} Q I o
DRV

WRT

O |G

& | 0@

ojo

)

CENTER | RX50
SLOT

1 £

o—8

f38a

SEL F3 F4 I I I SLG 0
M3 H4 | o—e I [¢] I o
ACK k3 ka oI oIo—o
Ex 11314 I I I I I o
PORY
[#
o]
M1 M2 10
SEL
M4 ¢} [s) I
DRy

pRy

[ F1

F2 4

1K1 K2

o©

oclo

)

[»}

e—o

301108

Microsystems Options

RRD40

RRD40 Optical Disc Drive Subsystem
The RRD40 is a high-performance, read-only optical disc storage device.
The RRD40 stores 600 Mbytes of information (equivalent to 1600 floppy
disks) or 200,000 typewritten pages. The RRD40 has an average seek time
of less than 500 microseconds and a transfer rate of 175 Kbytes/s. The
media is a removable 4.7-inch compact disc enclosed in a protective selfloading carmer

Up to two RRD40 drives can be controlled by a single KRQ50-SA or SF
Q-bus controller.

The RRD40-DC is a tabletop device for MicroVAX I1, MicroVAX 3500/3600,
and MicroVAX 3800/3900 systems. The Q-bus system uses a KRQ50 (M7552)
controller riodule to interface with ..> host system.
Orderi.g Information
RRD40 Optical Disc Drive

RRD40-AA (SCSD)

RRD40-DA (tabletop)

RRD40-DC (Q-bus)

Module KRQ50-xx and Tabletop Q-bus

M7552-XX

External I/0 Cable

BCO6R-12 (Q-bus)

Test Disk

23-23507-08

Controiler

Operating System Support
MicroVMS
DECnet RSX
RT-11
RSTS

ULTRIX-32

VAXELN

Diagmostic Support

Q-bus Interface

Uses the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor, Ver-

Maintenance Kit

ZNABX-GZ, C5

Test Disc

23-23507-03

gion 3.01 {release 126) and later to test

RRD40

Documentation
RRD40 Disc Drive Owner’s Manual
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM) UG

EK-RRD40-OM
AA-FM7AE-DN

MicroVAX Systems Maintenance Guide

EK-001AA-UD

MicroVAX 3500/3600 Systems Maintenance

EK--159AA-UD

Update

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Rus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

KRQ50 Q-bus
Controlle-

M7552

3.5

0.0

17.5

2.4

0.5

The RRD40 tabletop drive (Figure 1) has been designed for Q-bus and SCSI
systems. The half-height drive (Figure 2) is only used with SCSI media.

RRD40

Figure 1:

RRDA40 Tabletop Drive

RRD40

Figure 2:

RRD40 Hali-Height Drive

MO 003683

Table 1:

Front Panel

Front panel

Activity indicator

Activity indicator lights solid

When disc is correctly loaded

Activity indicator light flashes

When disc is transferring data

Power indicator lights

When power ie applied to RRD40

RRD40

The rear panel (Figure 3) clearly shows the Q-bus cable connection, the
power switch, and voltage selector.
Figure 3:

RRD40 Rear Panel

Q-BUS INTERFACE
POWER SWITCH —7

[y —
3 C

[»)

—d

o I

I
d

‘CL—;

Z—*D«BUS INTEREACE

CABLE CONNECTOR

VOLTAGE SELECTOR—

MLt 03584

KRQ50-xx (M7552—-PA) Controller Module
The KRQ50 Q-bus adapter module is used to control one or two RRD40DC compact disc drive units. The RRD40-DC/KRQ50-xx subsystem is used
with B200-series enclosures.

Contiguring the KRQ50 Module

Select the CSR address on the KRQ50 with switchpack S1 and jumper
J7 (Figure 4). Switchpack S1 has 10 switches, numbered 1 through 10.
The switches set Q-bus address bits 2 through 11. Jumper J7 sets Q-bus
address bit 12. Address bits 0 and 1 and 13 through 21 are preset. These
bits cannot be changed on the KRQ50 module.

The CSR address for the KRQ50 is floating. The factory setting for the

KRQ50-SF is 17760334g. If the system has other options with floating
addresses, you may need to change the factory setting after cslculating the
CSR address for the KRQ50.

RRDA40

Figure 4:

KRQ50 Module Layout (M7552)

s Py
=
Jumper J7 is
Address Bit 12

@85 - Switch ON (Closed)

Binary 1
Cm - Switch OFF (Open)

Binary 0

Address Bit 2

Switch 1 1s

Address Bit 11

Switch 10 is

Factory Settings Are Shown

Switch Pack 1
MLO-003585

RRD40

When setting up the address on the KRQ50 module, follow these three
rules:

Jumper J7 15 the highest selectable address bit. 1t 1s address bit 12,

Switch 10, the closest switch to J7 on the switchpack, is the second

Switch 1, the switch that is the farthest away from J7, is the lowest
selectable address bit. It is address bit 2.

highest selectable address bit. 1t is address bit 11.

Use Table 2 to assign any of the first seven available addresses. Determine
the address the KRQ50 will have and set the jumper and the switches
according to Table 2. Use Figure 4 as a guide to setting jumper J7.
Table 2:

KRQ50 CSR Addresses

Q-bus Addr

gwijtch.

Bit

pack

772150 760334 760340 760344 760350 760354 760360

Jumper

18]

)

[

Switches
¢

Off

Oper.

Closed.

Jumper J7
0

Jumper

{Parallel

1
-

Jumper

installed
to

handle)

horizontally X
X---X

installed vertically X

(Perpendicular

handle)

!
X

RRDA40

Assigning a Q-bus Interface Address 1D/Unit Number
For the Q-bus interface, the unit number 1s set through the MicroVAX
Diagnostic Monitor (MDM) The RRD40 drive comes preset to unit number
0. If vou are assigning the RRD40 dmnve umit number | you need not run
the MDM utihity. If vou want to set the RRD40 to a uni number other than
unit number 0, procede as follows:

Load the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor.

At the Main Menu select Option #3: Display System Utilities Menu.
Thas will put vou into the utility that sets the unit number.

Follow the step by step instructions and set the unit number.

Return to the Main Menu and exit out of MDM by selecting Option #5.

The preferred address for the KRQ50 i1s 17,772,1505.

If this address is
occupied by another MSCP disk controller (such as the M7555 RQDX3
controller), the KRQ50 1s set to the first available address starting at
17,760,3345.
NOTE: Address 17,760,334¢ 1s the factory setting for the KRQ50.

Testing the Existing System
Use the MicroVAX diagnostic monitor (MDM) to test the exasting MicroVAX
system as follows:
1.

Boot the MDM.

Refer to MDM Svstem User's Guide (AA~-FM7AE-DN)

Test the existing svstem to make sure it is running properly.

After tne test runs sucessfully, remove the tape cartridge.

Turn the power switch off (O

Unplug the ac power cord from the wall outlet.

CAUTION: Alwavys remove the tape cartridge before turning power off.

RRD42/Optical Compact Disc

RRD42 Optical Compact-Disc Subsystem
The RRD42 is a 600-Mbyte optical CD reader that retrieves data in fixed-

length blocks from removable compact-disc media.
Performance
Seek time, average

Seek time, maximum full strake

400 ms, (typical)
800 ms, (typical)

Rotational speed, innermost track

530 rpm

Rotational speed, outermost track

200 rpm

Start time

2.0 second (maximum)

Stop time

2.0 second (maximum)

Transfer rate, sustained

150 Kbytes/second

Transfer rate, burst

1.50 Mbvtes/second (maximum)

Physical Specifications

Height

4.15 em (1.62 in)

Width

14.60 cm (5.75 in)

Depth
Weight

20.80 ¢ (8.0 mni

1.30 kg (2.8 Ib) RRD42--AA version
2.9 kg (6.30 1b) RRD42-DA version

Ordering Information

RRD42-DA

RRD42-FB

Tabletop model, with power supply

600-Mbyte CDROM SCS] tabletop for adding to
the MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3800, 3900, MicroVAX
II and VAX 4000 (USA only).

RRD42-DH

Same as the —-FB but is for Europe and GIA only.

RRD42/Optical Compact Disc

Flgure 1:

RRDA42 Front Panel (Tabletop and Embedded)

CADDY INSERTION
SLOT

HEADPHONE
LEVEL
CONTROL

HEADRHONE

DIMPLE FOR
EJECT
ID NUMBER
BUTTON
LABEL
oo

EME;EE-'}'CY
HOLE

INDICATOR
SHR-XRO0E2
.80

Figure 2:

RRD42 Tabletop Drive Rear Panel
SCSi BUS

SWICH

CONNECTORS

ID SELECT

AUDIO

OUTRUT

ACIN

CONNECTOR
(3 PIN;

sgg,&".:i

JACKS
RHR-XRO08
3-00

RRD42/Optical Compact Disc

Figure 1:

RRDA42 Front Panel (Tabletop and Embedded)

CADDY INSERTION
SLOT

o — w=m

JACK

CONTROL

HEADPHONE ~ HEADFHONE
LEVEL

Oz
1 4
3

DIMPLE FOR
1D

NUMBER

LABEL

EJECT

BUTToN

EMERGENCY

EJECT
HOLE

BUSY

INDICATOR
SHR-XRO0&2.00

Figure 2:

RRDA42 Tabletop Drive Rear Panel

ID SELECT

SWICH

AUDIO

QUTPUT
JACKS

SCSI BUS

CONNECTORS

POWER

AC IN

CONNECTOR

(3 PIN;

GROUND

TERMINAL

FHR-XRDD8 390

RRD42/Optical Compact Disc
Figure 3:

RRD42 Embedded Drive (-AA Version) Rear Panel

=
AUDIO OUT
MODE wd

|/ CL UL )

e o
& o

o
d

| La |

EVa5%

QND 12Ve10%

|°

DC INPUT

o1
2

ID SELECT

[fescejj'
124

———

coop

LR X]

o
0

PO 00OOGDDSB0
0000000000
000000000 [(XiIXII1lXlXi)
)v

!
il

FRAME

SCSI BUS

‘

GROUND
TAB

INTERFACE
CONNECTOR

PoNEETD

SHR-XR0064-80

RRD42/Optical Compact Disc

Figure 4:

Connecting a SCS! Signal Cable (Drive-to-System)

RRD42/0Optical Compact Disc

Figure 5: Conngcing the 50-Pin SCSI Signal Cable {Drive-to-Drive)

TO HOST

SYSTEM

CABLE

N
SCS!
TERMINATOR
g

SHR=XRO08E.ED

RRD50

RRD50 Digital Disk Subsystem
Ordering Information
120 V

240 V

RRD50-QA

RRD50-QC

RRD50 optical disk drive

KRP50 controller module

M7552

Filtered connector

Cable from drive to filtered

BC18R-6

RRD50 optical disk drive subsystem

connector

Operating System Support

MicroVMS

Version 4.2 and later

Diagnostic Support

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Power-up self-test LEDs

Versian 1 .08 trelease 108 and later
Two LEDs on front of RRD50
Two LEDs on the M7552 module

Documentation
RRD Subsystem Packet Service Guide
RRD50 Digital sk Drive User’s Guide

EK-RRD50--PS
EK-RRD50-UG

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

KRP50

M7552

Power

{

(Amps)

Bus Loads
AC

Insert

Microsystems Options

RRD50

The RRD50 subsystem, shown in Figure 1, is a read-only storage device
that reads data stored on 11.8-cm (4.7-in) optical disks. One optical disk
stores 600 Mbytes of data. The following table lists the CSR addresses
for RRD50 systems.

Figure 2 shows the switch locations on the KRP50

controller module.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you

work with the internal parts of a computer system.
CSR Addresses

for an KRP50 Controller

Address

Al2

All Al10 A9

17772150

17760334

17760354

Bits:

Jumper/
Switches:

]

[

switch on,

[
o

CSR Address:

switch off

jumper

in horizontal position

jumper

in vertical

Microsystems Options

position

RRDS0

Figure 1:

RRD50 Subsystem

MicroVAX [l SYSTEM

_~RRD50 DISK DRIVE

MLO 0012106

Microsystems Options

RRD50

Figure 2:

KRP50 Controlier Module Layout (M7552)

NOTE: If a system contains an RQDX2 or RQDX3 controller, this controller
must use the first MSCP address (17772150), and the KRP50 must use a
floating address.

Microsystems Options

RRD50

RRDS0 Power-Up Tests
Figure 3 shows the power-up self-test

LEDs on

the M7752 controller

module. Table 1 lists the LED sequence for a successful test.
Figure 3:

RRD50 (M7552) Power-Up Self-Test LEDs

ML)

Table 1:

HOE

RRDS50 (M7552) Power-Up LED Sequence

LED Sequence for Successful Test

Meaning

Left LED flashes at 1-second intervals.

No RRI:0 drives are present.

Right LED 1s off.
A 2-second cycle occurs as follows:

Left LED

Right LED

Off
On

On
Off

off

Off

One good RRD5BO drive 1s present.

Cyele repeats

Both LEDs flash together at 1-second

Two good RRD50 drives are present.

intervals.

Right LED stays on continuously

One or two bad RRDA0 drives are present.

Microsystems Options

RWZ01

RWZ01 Magneto-Optical Disc Subsystem
The RWZ01 Magneto-Optical Disc, hereafter called the RWZ01, provides
594 Mbytes of formatted data. This device uses large capacity removable
discs and has the following features:
A read/write disc using magneto-optical recording with a multiple write
capability.

A large capacity disc (594 Mbyte, 512 bytes/sector, excluding alternate
areas). .

A disk format that complies with Continuous/Composite Servo (CS)
format (ISO/IEC DIS 10089) of International Standards Organization
(ISO), which is the world standard.

A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) which complies with ANSI
X3,131-1986, CCS Rev.B4.
Up to eight units, including the host
computer, can be connected to one SCSI bus.
A high-speed transmission of data using a 2400-rpm spindle motor. A

seek time of 95 ms using thin, light-weight optical pick-up.
An error detection using Long Distance Code (LDC).
Storage Capacity
Storage capacity (formatted)

590 Mbytes per disk

Performance
Average seek time

95 milliseconds (/3 full stroke)

Maximum seek time (rotational delay
including SCSI overhead)

185 milliseconds.

Average access time

Less than 110 milliseconds

Transfer rate from the media

7.40 Mbytes/second

Loading time

6.4 seconds (average)

Unloading time

3.6 seconds (average)

Transmission speed

620 Kbytes

Laser Wave length

785 nm

Laser Output

30 mW

Laser Method

Semiconductor Laser GaAlAs

Microsystems Options

RW201

Physical Specifications
Height

12.2 cm (4.96 in)

Width

21.1em (8.3 in.)

Depth

30.0 cm (11.81 in)

Weight

6.73 kg (14.96 1b)

Configuration Information
Data surfaces

Number of tracks

18751/side

Number of sectors

Power Requirements:
United States and Canada:

100 to 120 Vac @ 50/60 A

Europe:

220 to 440 Vac @ 50/60 A

Current drain:

U.8.A. and Canada:

0.45 A max.

FEurope:

0.3 A max.

Ordering Information

Paxt

Name

RWX1K-01

Magneto-optical disc cartridge

RWX1H-AA

Lens cleaning cartridge kit

RWZ01-AA

Tabletop magneto-optical disc subsystem (includes

BC13C-07

SCSI Interface Cable

power cord)

Related Documentation

EK-TF85-0M

TF85 Cartridge Tape Subsystem Owner’s Manual

EK-TK85-RC

TK85 Cartridge Tape Drive Reference Card

DC Power and Bus Loads

Current
(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads
(Maximum)

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

TF85

—

1.5

1.0

36.3

0.0

TF85 Tape Subsystem
Flgure 6:

TF85 Tape Drive Front Panel

TF85 TAPE DRIVE

Orange Light
Yellow Light

Orange Light

Green Light

| Cartridge insert/
Release Handie

Bus Node —

D Pulg

MLO-006543

TF86

TF86 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
The TF86 is a DSSI-based streaming cartridge tape drive that provides 6
gigabytes of storage on a CompacTape 111 cartrndge.

Ordering Information

TF86 DLT in a tabletop enclosure,

CompacTape 111 cartridge, U.S. power cord,
and documentation (requires external DSSI
cable)
TF86 for BA4xx enclosure, CompacTape 111
cartridge, U.S. power cord, and documentation (factory installed)
TF86 for BA4xx enclosure, CompacTape 111

TF86-TA

TF86E—JA

TF86E~JF

cartridge, U.S. power cord, and documentation (field installed)
Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

6 gigabytes, formatted

Performance

Transfer rate (formatted user data)

Tape speed

800 kilobytes/second
390 cm/second (100 in/second)

Recording density

42 500 bits/inch

Number of tracks

112

Recording technique

Two-track parallel, serpentine

Compatibility

TZ30/TK50/TK70 tape drives

Read compatibility

Tx85 tape drives

Read/write compatibility

TF86

Physical Specifications

Height

8.6 cm (3.4 1n)

Width

149 em (5.9 in)

Depth

24.4 cm (9.6 n)

Weight

3.2 kg (7.0 1b)

Configuration information

Form factor

5.25-inch footprint

Power Requirements

+5 Vde, 3.5 A (typical)
+12 Vdc, 1.2 A (typical)
+12 Vdc, 1.5 A (peak)
Power consumption

35 W

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.4-2 with restrictions in:
Device name recognition

Error reporting facility

Standalone backup
Diagnostic Support

Power-On Self-test (POST)
Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.
See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Release 137A and later

Related Supplies

CompacTape III tape cartridge
Cleaning cartridge

TK85K-01

DSSI cable

CK-SF200-LP

TK85-HC

TF86

Reiated Documentation

Tx86 Tape Drive Operator’s Reference Card

EK-OTK86-RC

Tx86 Series Cartridge Tape Subsystem

EK-OTX86-OM

Owner’s Manual
Installing the TF86 Tabletop Cartridge Tape

EK-TF86T-1G

Subsystem
BA400 Storage Devices Installation

Procedure

EK-BA44A-IN

TF867

TF867 Magazine Tape Subsystem
The TF867 subsystem combines the TF86 cartridge tape drive with an autematic

cartridge loader. It provides reliable, unattended backup capability for DSSIbased systems. When fully loaded with seven cartridges, the TF867 subsystem
can back up as much as 42 gigabytes of data in 16 hours without operator
intervention.

Ordering information

TF867 cartridge loader subsystem with

SF106-AA/AB

pedestal enclosure, 120 V/240 V, field
installed (requires external DSSI cable)
TF857-t0-TF867 and SF100-to-SF106

TF867-UG

upgrade
Storage Capacity

Data storage capacity

42 gigabytes, formatted

(6 gigabytes per cartridge)
Performance

Tape speed

800 kilobytes/second
390 em/second (100 in/second)

Recording density

42,500 bits/inch

Number of tracks

112

Recording technique

Two-track parallel, serpentine

Transfer rate (formatted user data)

Compatibility

TZ30/TK50/TK70 tape drives
Tx85 tape drives

Read compatibility
Read/write compat:bility

TF867 Physical Specifications

Height

26.5 cm (10.4 in)

Width

22.2 cm (8.8 in)

Depth

64.7 cm (25.5 1n)

Weight

25 kg '55.0 1b)

TF867

Magazine Physical Specifications

Height

21.0 em (8.63 1n)

Width

13.25 em (5.22 in)

Depth

11.8 cm (4.65 in)

Weight (fully loaded)

2.1 kg (4.51b)

SF106 Physical Specifications

Height

68.6 cm (27.0 1n)

Width

45.7 cm (18.0 in)

Depth

86.4 cm (34.0 in)

Weight

102.2 kg (225.0 1b)

Power Requirements

+5 Vde, 3.5 A (typical)

+12 Vdc, 1.2 A (typical)
+12 Vdc, 1.5 A (peak)

Power consumption

82 W (typical)

Operating System Support

OpenVMS

Version 5.4—-2 with restrictions in:
Device name recognition

Error reporting facility
Standalone backup
Dlagnostic Support

Power-On Self-test (POST)

See the device documentation.

Diagnostic Utilities Protocol (DUP)

See the device documentation.

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM)

Release 137A and later

TF867

Rolated Documentation

Tx86 Tape Drive Operator’s Reference Card
SF106 Storage Array Installation Guide

EK-OTK86-RC
EK-SF106-IN

Tx867 Series Magazine Tape Subsystem

EK-TX867--OM

Owner’s Manual

TKZ60

TKZ60 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
The TKZ60 1s a tape drive that is an industry standard 1/4-inch (QIC)
cartridge streaming tape device. The tape cartridge capacity is 220 Mbytes,
using a 600-foot tape.
The TKZ60 is used for backup and for data
interchange for BA400-series enclosures.

The TKZ60 is a 1/2-inch SCSI cartridge tape drive subsystem. ‘The TKZ60
has 18 tracks of parallel recording with a thin film head. It can interface
with the IBM 3480 to provide format data interchange, archival storage,
software distribution, on-line transaction management, and backup for
large and small computing systems. The TKZ60 uses the same 200-Mbyte
tape cartridge as the TA90 and IBM 3480 drives. It can also provide 1
Gbyte of data storage using a five-magazine loader, and 2 Gbytes using a
ten-magazine loader.

The TKZ60 uses an optional KZQSA for SCSI interface and for VAX/VMS
Q-bus systems.

Storage Capacity
User cartridge capacity formatted
Maximum cartridge magazine capacity

220 Mbytes
2.2 Gbytes

formatted

Ordering Information

2R-TKZ60-BA

Tabletop tape cartridge subsystem that is used

2R-TKZ60-BC

Tabletop tape cartridge subsystem with loader,

with SCSI based VAX 4000 systems

that is used with SCSI based VAX 4000 systems
and a DECsystem 5500

Accessories Information
CompacTape EYE Length
CompacTape EYE Width

36,576 cm (1200 ft)
10.795 cm (4 1/4 in)

Number of Tracks

24 pairs (48)

dumper Part Number

12-14314-00

Supported

ULTRIX V4.1, VMS V5, 4.2, and SCO UNIX

Model

Tabletop

Microsystems Options

TKZ60

Performance
Average transfer rate
Burst transfer rate

200 kilobytea/second
1.5 megabytes/second

Read/write speed

120 inches/second - streaming

Transafer rate

200 Kbytes

Surge current at start-np

12Vdc@5.0 A

Form factor

5.25-inch half height

Tape speed

39.4-in/second

Nominal load/unload time

15 second

Nominal rewind time

60 second

Maximum reposition time

250 ms

Tabletop Dimensions
Height
Width

13.3 em (5.25 in)
21.7 cm (8.56 in)

Depth

54 em (21.25 in)

Dimensions
Height

19 cm (7.5 in)

Width

22.9 cm (9.0 in)

Depth with loader

76.2 cm (30.0 in)

Depth

58.4 cm (23.0 in)

Weight

13.5 kg (30.0 1b)

Loader Weight

247 kg (5.5 Ib)

Power Requirements
Power consumption

Nominal 150 W
Maximum (180 W)
+5Vde

@10 A

12Vdc @ 1.75 A
Voltage

88 to 132 VAC

Frequency

47.0 to 63.0 Hertz

176 to 264 VAC

Inrush current

1st cycle 45 A (Max)

2nd cycle (25 A Max)

TKZ60

Related Documentation

EK-SCSIS-0V

Small Computer System Interface (An Overview

EK-SCSIS-SP

Small Computer System Interface (A development

AA-PAJ2A-TE

VMS Version 5.3 Small Computer System Inter-

Version 1.0}
guide)

face (SCS81-2) Device Support Manual,

TEKZ80 Jumpers

SCSI ID

SEL2

SEL1

SELO

0
1
2

OuUT
ouT
ouT

ouUT
ouT
IN

ouT
IN
ouT

ouT

5
6

IN
IN

ouT
IN

IN
ouT

Microsystems Options

TKS0

TK50 Tape Drive Subsystem
For BA200-series enclosures, order the TKS50 as a system option only,
You can install ¢ TK50 tape drive subsystem in a BA23 enclosure, or use
the TK50 as a standalone desktop unit. In a BA123 system, the TK50 is
usually installed in the enclosure.

If you want a complete TK50 subsystem, you must order a TK50 drive and
a TQK50 controller subsystem.
Ordering Information
Tape drive for BA200-series

TK50-8A factory installed)
TK50-8F (field upgrade:

Internal Drives

BA23 or H9642-]

BAI123

TK50 drive and blank cartridge

TK5H50-AA

TKAH0-AA

TQKH0 :M75461 controller subsystem

TQK50-AA

TQK5H0-BA

External Drives

BAzZ3

BA123

120 V desktop drive

TK50-DA

TK50--DA

240 V desktop drive

TK50--DB

TKH0-DB

120 V rack mount drive

TK50-RA

240 V rack mount drive

TK50-RB

TK50-RRB

TQKS50 1 M7546) controller subsystem

TQKH0-AB

TQK50-BB

Operating System Support

Micro/RSX

Version 2.2 and later
Version 4 0 and later

MicroVMS

Version 4. 1m and later

Micro/RSTS

RSTSE

Yersion 9.5 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M-PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5.4D and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.1 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.0 and later

Microsystems Options

TKS0

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

Version 1.03 (release 103) and later

Version 2.1 (release 134 and later:
XTKABO0.OBJ, ZTKAE0.BIC, ZTKBC0.BI(.
Two LEDs (controller module:
Two LEDs (tape drive)

Power-up self-test LEDs

Documentation
TK50 Tape Drive Subsystem User's Guide
TK70 Tape Drive Subsystem Owner's
Manual

EK-LEP05-OM

EK-OTK70-OM

DC Pov.er and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Bus Loads

Power

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

TK50-AA
TK50-DA

1.4
0.0

0.0
0.0

.
-

TK50-RA
TQKS50

M7546

0.0
30

0.0
0.0

2.0

1.0

The TK50, shown in Figure 1, is a streaming tape drive subsystem that
provides up to 95 Mbytes of backup data storage on a tape cartridge.

Microsystems Options

TK50

TK50 Tape Drive Subsystem, BA23 and BA123 Enclosures

V. ttittirs 1y

Figure i:

The TQK50 (M7546) controller module provides the interface between the
TK50-AA tape drive and the Q22-bus. The M7546 has two DIP switches,
shown in Figure 2, which set the following features:
e

Hardware revision levei (set at the factory)

Unit number

Microsystems Options

TK50

Figure 2:

TQK50 Module Layout (M7546)

w4
{

UNIT

HARDWARE VUVBER

REVISION

W12

LEVEL

ADDRESS

W12 W13 W14

FOR MANUFACTURING TEST

~ee

JUMPERS N

PURPOSES ONLY
MUST BE INSTALLED

A2
|

The hardware revision level DIP switch 1s set to match the module revision

level stamped on the back of the module. Make sure the switch setting 1s
correct. The eight switches in this DIP switch represent a binary-weighted
value, as listed in the following table:
Revision

Level

Switch

Revision

Switches

Level

Settings

(A)

(B)

(C)

0 = open,
Switch

...0

= closed

nearest

the module edge.

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts ofa computer system.

Microsystems Options

TK50

You can select the unit number by setting the unit number DIP switch. If
the MicroVMS operating system is installed, you do not have to change the
switch setting. The following table lists the unit number settings:
Unit Number

Settings

Unit

Switches

Number

]

open,

Switch 8

factory

...0

closed

is nearest the module edge.

The M7546 controller i1s a tape mass storage control protocol (TMS(Py
device. The CSR address for the first controller 1s fixed, using jumpers
shown in Figure 2. If you add a second subsystem, the CSR address of the
second controller floats. The following table lists the fixed CSR address for
the first controller and typical settings for a second controller:
Controller Module M7546
Default

for

first

Address

Bits

(Jumpers*) :

TMSCP

device:

17774500

Al2

All Al0 A9

17774500

Possible

addresses

for

second

CSR Address:

controller:

17760404

[

17760444

jumper installed,
is

the

0 =

jumper nearest

jumper removed
the module edge.

The interrupt vector for the M7546 is fixed at 260, set under program
control.

Microsystems Options

TK50

TQK50 Power-Up Tests
Figure 3 shows the LEDs on the TQK50 controller (M7546). Table 1 lists
the LED codes and probable FRU failures.
Figure 3:

TKS50 Module LEDs

Table 1:

(

TK50 LED Error Codes
LEDs

Test and Probable FRU Failures

Power-up test
1. TQK50 module

Off

L/Q port initialization
1. Controller

2. Interconnect cable
3. TK50 drive

Flashing

Fiashing

Fatal error detected by controller.
1. Interconnect cable {incorrectly keyed)
2. Controller
3. TK50 drive

Off

Microsystems Options

Normal operation

MLO O0Y1 14

TK70

TK70 Tape Drive Subsystem
For BA200-series enclosures, order the TK70 as a system option only.

If you want a complete TK70 subsystem, you must order a TK70 drive and
a TQK70 controller subsystem.
Ordering Information
Tape drive, BA200-series
TQK70 (M7559) controller subsystem
Tape drive, BA23, BA123,
and H9642-J enclosures
TQK70 (M7559) controller subsystem,

TK70E~SA (factory installed)
TK70E-SF (field upgrade)
TQK70-SA (factory installed)
TQK70-SF (field upgrade)
TK70-AA

TKQ70-AA

plus 75.cm (30-in) cable
for BA23

TQK70 (M7559) controller subsystem,
plus 75-cm (30-in) cable
for BA123

TKQ70-BA

Operating System Support
ULTRIX-32
VMS

Version 2.2 and later
Version 4.6a and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

Version 1.03 (release 103) and later

XXDp

Version 2.1 (release 134) and later: ZTKAEQ.BIC,

Power-up self-test LEDs

Two on controller module, two on tape drive

ZTKBCO0.BIC.

TK70

Documentation

TK70 Tape Dnve Subsystem Owner's
Manual

EK-OTK70-OM

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

TK70-A

35.8

TQK70-A

M7559

3.5

17.5

2.0

1.0

TQK70--S

M7559

17.6

4.3

0.5

TK70E-S

35.8

The TK70 is a streaming tape drive subsystem that provides up to 296
Mbytes of backup data storage on a tape cartridge. Figure 1 shows the
TK70 in its installation position, with attached sliding tracks.

The TK70 can read from, but cannot write to, cartridges that have been
formatted by a TK50 tape drive. The TK50 tape drive cannot read from
cartridges that have been formatted on the TK70 drive.
Digital recommends that you use CompacTape Il cartridges with the TK70
drive.

TK70

Figure 1:

TK70 Tape Drive

The TQK70 controller module (M7559) provides the interface between the
TK70 tape drive and the Q22-bus. The TQK70 has jumpers used to set the
following:

(SR address

Unit number

Clock signals

CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic mat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when vou
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

Select the unit number by setting the jumpers shown in Figure 2. If the
VMS operating system is installed, you do not have to change the jumper.

Microsystems Options

TK70

Figure 2:

TQK70 Module Layout (M7559)

UNIT SELECT

OO"\

e
MLG

The unit number is set as follows:
Unit Number

Settings

Unit

Jumpers

Number

...3

]

and so

0 =

jumper

on top and center post

(module

bottom

fingers

and

to the

Microsystems Options

center post

right)

TK70

Three other jumpers on the M7559 module are installed by the factory.
Their functions are as follows:
e

WI1: jumper IN connects 9-MHz 80186 CPU clock

W2: jumper IN connects the 18-MHz system clock

W22 jumper IN connects a 3-MHz clock to TxCB and RxCB pins (pins
7 and 4)

The M7559 controller is a tape mass storage control protocol (TMSCP)
device. The CSR address for the first M7546 is fixed, using jumpers shown
in Figure 2. If you add a second TK70 subsystem, the CSR address of the
second controller floats. The following table lists the fixed CSR address for
the first controller and typical settings for a second controller:
Controller Module M7559 CSR Address:

17774500

(factory position)

Address Bits

(Jumpers*) :

Al2

All Al0Q AS

AS5

CSR Address:

17774500

Possible addresses

0
for

second controller:

17760404

17760444

jumper installed,

0 =

jumper

is the

jumper

nearest

removed

the module edge.

The interrupt vector is fixed at 260, set under program control.

Microsystems Options

TLZ04 Tape Drive

TLZ04 Tape Drive
The TLZ04 is a 1.2-Gbyte cassette (DAT) SCSI tape drive, either tabletop
or embedded in the VAX 4000 system. The KZQSA controller module 1s
used to interface with the TLZ04 drive.
Figure 1:

TLZO04 Tape Drive

MLO-006535

TLZ04 Tape Drive
Figure 2:

TLZ04 Front Panel

load

léls:oafl

Drive indicator

Tape Incicator

Bus Node
)
1D Plug TM40t

MLO-005538

Functional Information
Recording media

Magnetic tape

Mode of operation

Streaming and stari/stop

Drive interface

RDAT compatible

Data storage capacity

1.2 Gbytes, unformatted

Ordering Information

TLZ04-JA
TLZ04-JF
TLZ04-DA
TLZ04-GA

Embedded (Factory installed) BA400-geries
Embedded (Field installed) BA400-geries
Tabletop
Tabletop including BCO6P cable

TLZ04 Tape Drive

Performance
Passes per cassetts tape

Media
Bit density
Transfer rate (sustained)

Recording format
Caassette capacity
Read/Write apeed
Peak transfer rate, raw
Peuk transfer rate, user data
Average file access time
Rewinding time

300

TLZ04~CA cassetts tape
114 Mbytes/square inch
183 Kbytes/second

Digital data storage (DDS)
1.2 Gbytes
Q.87 Kbytes/second
180 Kbytes/second
170 Kbytes/second
20 seconds
40 seconds

Physical Specifications

Height

Width
Depth
Weight

10.0 cm (3.8 in) tabletop
8.2 cm (3.35 in) embedded

32.5 cm (12.7 in) tabletop

14.60 cm (5.7 in) embedded

28.5 cm (11.2 in) tabletop
21.44 cm (8.44 in) embedded

7.72 kg (17.0 Ib) tabletop
2.20 kg (7.72 Ib) embedded

Data Organization
Recording technology

Helical scan

Recording method

Digital Data Storage (DDS)

Recording density

61,000 bite/inch

Racord size

Variable

Maximum capacity

1.2 Gbytes, formatted

60m x ¢ mm

Maintenance

Recommended cleaning

Every 26 hours

Configuration Information

Form factor

Standard 5.25-inch footprint (DAT drive)

Power requirements

90t0 132V, 16 A

Power consumption (drive)

198010264V, 1.0 A
400 W

Power consumption (tabletop)

230 W

TLZ04 Tape Drive

Related Documentation

EK-TSZ07-IN-001

TSZ07 Installation/Ownet's Manual

EK-TSZ07-TM-001

TSZ07 Technical Manual

TZ85

TZ85 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
The TZ85 series of SCSI cartridge tape subsystems are primarily used as
backup storage devices and as devices for loading software onto Digital

The transfer rate of 800 Kbytes/second o'. a single
cartridge (unattended).

computer systems.

The TZ85 tape subsystem is a streaming tape device with a sustained
transfer rate of up to 800 Kbytes/second, and up to 2.6 Gbytes of formatted
capacity on a single cartridge.
Storage Capacity
User Cartridge Capacity Formatted

2.6 Gbytes

Ordering Information
TZ85-JA

Embedded (Factory installed) BA400 Series

TZ85~JF

Embedded (Field installed) BA400 Series

TZ85-TA

Tabletop model for SCSI based systems.

Performance
CompacTape EYE Length

36,000 cm (1200 ft)

CompacTape EYE Width

10.8 ¢m (4.26 in)

Number of tracks

24 pairs (48)

Tape speed

100 inches/second, streaming

Bit density

42,500 bits per inch

Track density

96 tracks/in (48 tracks)

Track format

Two-track parallel, serpentine recording

Transfer rate, raw

1.1 Mbytes/second

Sustained transfer rate, use: data

.8 Mbytes/second

Peak transfer rate

On SCSI-2 bus = 4.0 Mbytes/second (sync mode)

Tabletop Power Requirements
Form factor

Tabletop

+5 Vdc @ 3.5 A (75 mV ripple peak-to-peak)
+12Vdc @ 1.2 A (1.5 A surge)
Power consumption

56.4 W maximum
29.7 W typical

35 W average
Line type

Molex 51294A

Pesk in-rush

50 A

Line frequency

47-63 Hz

Microsystems Options

TZ85

Tabletop Power Requirements
Line type

Single-phase AC

Data Organization
Recording format
Recording density

48 track serial serpentine fixed block
42 500 bpi

Recarding method

MFM, but serial data

Track density

96 tracks/inch

Normal track spacing

8.5 mils

Read-write head

Two channel ferrite, servo-controller

Record size

Variable up to (64 Kbytes - 1 Mbytes)

4 Kbyte blocking factor
Read-write gap (spacing)

.21 inches +/- .001 inches

Cartridge Specifications
Height

2.54 cm (1.0 in), drive only

Width

10.54 cm (4.15 in)

Length

10.57 cm (4.165 in)

Weight

226 grams (8 cunces)

Enclosure Specifications
Height

14.48 cm (6.7 in), drive only

Width

11.43 cm (4.5in)

Length

22.86 cm (9.0 in)

Weight

3.16 kg (7 pounds)

TZ85 Tabletop Specifications
Peight

14.63 cm (5.7 in), drive only

Width

23.50 cm (9.25 in)

Length

33.22 cm (13.08 in)

Weight (box)

4.5 kg (10 pounds)

Weight (tabletop)

7.2 kg (17 pounds)

TZ85

Related Documentation
EK-OTK85-RC
AA-Z407B-TE
Al-Y506B-TE

Tx85 Tape Drive Operator's Reference Card
VAX/VMS Backup Utility Reference Manual
Guide to VAX/VMS Disk and Magnetic Tape

AA-ZA24A-TE

VAX/VMS Mount Utility Reference Manual

Operations

Related Supplies

TK85K-01

Data cartridge

TK85K-07
TK85-HC

Data Cartridge, quantity 7

TK86-M
BC56H-3F

SZ100 cartridge magazine
Three-foot 68-pin to 50-pin positive SCSI adapter

BCs6H-6F

Six-foot 68-pin to 50-pin positive S8CSI adapter

BC56H-9F

Head cleaner

cable assembly

Nine-foot 68-pin to 50-pin positive SCSI adapter
cable assembly

Microsystems Ootions

TZ857

TZ857 Magazine Tape Subsystem
The TZ857 magazine t& e subsystem is an electromechanical device that
can store approximately 18.2 Gbytes of data. Using CompacTape EYE
cartridges, the TZ857 subsyster: can store up to 2.6 Gbytes of data per
cartridge.

The TZ857 magazine tape subsystem can load or unload tape cartridges into
and from a tape drive providing unattended backup as well as performing
single cartridge operations. The TZ857 performs automatic, sequential tape
operations.

In addition, the TZ857 subsystem executes operating system commands,
qualifiers, and parameters to store data from user disk areas to the tape
drive.
Storage Capacity
Magazine Capacity Format-

18.2 Gbytes

ted

Performance

Cartridge capacity
CompacTape EYE Length

2.6 Cbytes
36,676 cm (1200 ft)

CompacTape EYE Width

10.7 cm (4.25 in)

Number of Tracks

24 pairs (48)

Operating mode

Streaming

Tape speed

100 inches /second

Bit density

42,600 bits per inch

Track density

96 tracks/in (48 tracks)

Track format

Two-track parallel, serpentine recording

Transfer rate

Up to 800 Kbytes per second

Magazine Characteristics
Height
Width

21.9 ¢m (B.62 in)
13.3 ecm (5.22 in)

Length

11.74 ¢m (4.846 in)

Weight (empty)

0.58 kg (1.3 1bs)

Weight (loaded)

2.03 kg (4.5 tbs)

Microsystems Options

12857

Power Requirements
Form factor
Voltage normal

120 Vac/230 Vac

Voitage minimum

90 Vac/180 Vac

Voltage m.iximum

135 Va¢/270 Vae

Power consumption

83.5 W maximum, 82 W typical

Peak in-rush

50 A

Line frequency

47-63 Hertz

Line type

Single.-phase AC

Electrical rate

100-120 Vac @ 2.0 A, 220-240 Vdc @ 1.0 A

Physical Specifications

Length

26.47 ¢m (10.42 inches)
64.77 ¢m (25.5 inches)

Width

22.20 cm (8.74 inches )

Height

Weight

249 kg

Nowse level

62 dB

Related Documentation
EK-TF857-OM
EK-OTK85-RC

TX857 Series Magazine Tape Subsystem Qwners Manual
Tx85 Tape Drive Operator’s Reference Card

AA -Z407B-TE

VAX/VMS Backup Utility Reference Manual

Al-Y506B--TE

Guide to VAX/VMX Disk and Magnetic Tape Operations

AA-7424A-TE

VAX/VMX Mount Utility Reference Manual

Related Supplies

TK85K-01
TK86K-07

Data cartridge
Duata Cartridge, quantity 7

TK85-HC

Head cleaner

TK85-M

S7.100 cartridge magazine

BC56H-3F

Three-foot 68-pin
assembly

BCs6H-6F

Six-foot 88-pin to H0-pin positive SCS] adapter cable assembly

BC56H--9F

Nine-foot
assembly

Microsyctems Options

68-pin

50.pin

B50-pin

positive

SCSI

SCS!

adapter cable

TU81-PLUS

TU81-PLUS Tape Drive
Ordering Information

TUB1-PLUS tape drive subsystem

120 V. 60 Hz

240 V. 50 Hz

TU81-PLUS

TU81-PLUS tape drive

KLESI-S adapter module

M7740-PA

KLESI-A adapter module

M7740

70-19923-04

70--19923-04

Cable from signal distribution
to drive

BC17Y-xx

/O panel insert

74-28666-01

for BA200-series

for BA23

90-cm (36-in) cable to signal
distribution

Operating System Support
MicroVMS

Version 4.3 buffer support only by backup

utility

MicroVMS

Version 4.4 and later

RSTS/E

Version 9.5 and later

RSX-11M

Version 4.3 and later

RSX-11M- PLUS

Version 4.0 and later

RT-11

Version 5.4D and later

ULTRIX-11

Version 3.1 and later

ULTRIX-32m

Version 1.2 and later

VAXELN

Version 2.3 and later

Diagnostic Support
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
XXDP

Version 1.14 (release 114) and later
Version 2.1 (release 1341 and later:
ZTUTAO0.BIN, XTUCB0.OBJ

Power-up self-tests

None

Microsystems Options

TU81-PLUS

Documentation
TU81/TA81 Tape Subsystem User's
Guide
TU81/TA81 Tape Subsystem Technical
Manual

EK-TUA81-UG

TU81 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Pocket
Service Guide

EK-OTU81-PS

EK-TUAB81-TM

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

Watts

Insert

KLESI-A
KLESI-S

M7740
M7740-PA

3.0
3.0

15.0
15.0

23
23

1.0
1.0

A
-

The TU81-PLUS, shown in Figure 1, is a dual-speed, 9-track magnetic
streaming tape subsystem. The drive is microprocessor-controlled and
includes a 256-Kbyte cache buffer memory. The buffer increases the amount
of time that the drive is streaming, which reduces backup and copy time.

Microsystems Options

TU81-PLUS
Figure 1:

TU81-PLUS Drive in an H9643 Enclosure
TUBT TAPE
TRANSPORT

CONTROL
PANEL

MLO-001121

The TU81-PLUS is installed in a separate 48.3-cm (19-in) H9643 rack
mount cabinet, similar to the H9642—J. For removal and replacement
procedures, see the TU81 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Pocket Service Guide.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage integrated circuits. Use the wrist
strap and antistatic riat found in the Antistatic Kit (29-26246) when you
work with the internal parts of a computer system.

The TU81-E subsystem includes a KLESI Q22-bus adapter module, two
cables, and an I/O panel insert. You set the CSR address for the KLESI

Microsystems Options

TU81-PLUS

module (M7740) by using DIP switch E58 (Figure 2 for BA200-series
enclosures; Figure 3 for the BA23 enclosure). The table under Figure 3
hists the CSR address to use. The interrupt vector is set under program
control.

NOTE: When you order a KLESI module, check the setting of the CSR
address. If necessary, reset the CSR address before installing the module.
The TU81-PLUS drive is powered by the 874-D (120 V. 60 Hz) or the 874—F

(240 V, 50 Hz) power controller. The drive uses 300 VA when loaded or on
standby, and up to 550 VA when starting and stopping.

KLESI Module Layout (M7740), BA200-Series

s ¢]

Figure 2:

=[] [onaaneenta

SW1

MLO-001122

Microsystems Options

TU81-PLUS

Figure 3:

KLESI Module Layout (M7740)

SWITCHPACK
E 58

Swi

{ .".J.

SWi10

r—.—-—-d

KLESI

(M7740)

CSR Address:

17774500

(factory position)

Switchpack ES8

Address Bits:

Al2

All

Al10

Comwmmmneme

A9
E58

Switches

--~---~--- >

Jumper

17774500

= switch on,

0 = switch off

0 =

jumper

left

(module

edge

jumper

right

CSR Address:

and center

facing

you)

and center pin

Microsystems Options

VCB02/M7168 and M7169

VCB02 Video Subsystem
The VCBO2 is a full-page, high-resclution DMA color video subsystem capable of 8-plane color video memory display.
Ordering Information

Base module and two 4-plane modules

VCB02-CA
Configuration Information

Quad height
Base module at +5 Vdc, 5.8 A (typical)

Form factor
Power requirements

Base module at +12 Vdc, 0.7 A (typical)

4-plane module at +5 Vdec, 3.4 A (typical)

DC Power and Bus Loads
Current

(Amps)

Power

Bus Loads

Option

Module

+5V

+12V

Watts

Insert

VCB02-SA

M7168

12.0

0.47

65.64

3.5

0.1

M7169

A
Related Documentation
The following documents contain information relating to MicroVAX or
MicroPDP-11 systems and supported options for the BA400 series enclosures.
Document Title

Order Number

Module Options

CXA16 Technical Manual

EK-CAB16-TM

CXYO08 Technical Manual

EK-CXY08-TM

DEC FDDIlcontroller/Q-bus Installation

EK-DEFQA-IN

DEQNA Ethernet User’s Guide

EK-DEQNA-UG

DESQA Ethernet Adapter Option Installation Guide

EK-DEQNA-IN

DESQA Technical Manual

EK-DEQNA-TM

DHV11 Technical Manual

EK-DHV11-TM

DLV11-J User’s Guide

EK-DIV1J-UG

DMV11 Synchronous Controller Technical Manual

EK-DMV11-TM

DMV11 Synchronous Controller User’s Guide

EK-DMV11-UG

DPV11 Synchronous Controller Technical Manual

EK-DPV11-TM

DPV11 Synchronous Controller User’s Guide

EK-NPV11-UG

DRV11-J Interface User’s Manual

EK-DRV1J-UG

DRV11-WA General Purpose DMA User’s Guide

EK-DRVWA-UG

DTCO05 DECvoice Multivoice

EK-DTC05-UG

DZQ11 Asynchronous Multiplexer Technical Manual

EK-DZQ11-TM

DZQ11 Asynchronous Multiplexer User’s Guide

EK-DZQ11-UG

DZV11 Asynchronous Multiplexer Technical Manual

EK-DZV11-TM

Related Documentation

A-1

Document Title

Order Number

Module Options
DZV11 Asynchronous Multiplexer User’s Guide

EK-DZV11-UG

IBQO1 BITBUS Controller Technical Manual

EK-1BQ01-TM

IBQO1 BITBUS Controller Users Guide

EK-IBQ01-UG

IBQO1 Option Installation Guide

EK-IBQO1-IN

IEU11-A/IEQ11-A User’s Guide

EK-IEUQ1-UG

KA630-AA CPU Module User’s Guide

EK-KA630-UG

KA640-AA CPU Module User’s Guide

EK-KA640-UG

KA650-AA CPU Module User’s Guide

EK-KA650-UG

KDA50-Q CPU Module User’s Guide

EK-KDA5Q-UG

KDJ11-B CPU Module User’s Guide

EK-KDJ1B-UG

KDJ11-D/S CPU Module User’s Guide

EK-KDJ1D-UG

KDFi11-BA User's Guide

EK-KDFEB-UG

KFQSA Installation Guide

EK-KFQSA-IN

KMV11 Programmable Communications Controller User’s Guide

EK-KMV11-UG

KMV11 Programmable Communications Controller Technical
Manual

EK-KMV11-TM

LSI-11 Analog System User’s Guide

EK-AXV11-UG

MRV11-D Universal PROM Module Users Guide

EK-MRV1D-UG

Q-Bus DMA Analog Syste.n User’s Guide

EK-AV11D-UG

RQDX2 Controller Modu'e User’s Guide

EK-RQDX2-UG

RQDX3 Controller Module User’s Guide

EK-RQDX3-UG

A-2

Related Documentation

Document Title

Order Number

Disk and Tape Drives
BA400 Enclosures Storage Devices Installation Procedures

FK-BA44A-IN

DECarray Installation Guide

EK-SF2XX-1G

EF51R, EF52R, EF53 Solid State Disk User Guide

EK-EFSXX-UG

EF5xx-Series Solid State Disk Service Guide

EK-EF5XX-SG

EF5xx-Series Solid State Disk User Guide

EK-EF5XX-UG

RA60 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA60-SV

RA60 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA60-UG

RA81 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA81-8V

RAB81 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA81-UG

RA90 Disk Drive Service Manual

EK-ORA90-SV

RA90 Disk Drive User Guide

EK-ORA90-UG

RC25 Disk Subsystem User Guide

EK-ORC25-UG

RC25 Disk Subsystem Pocket Service Guide

EK-ORC25-PS

RF30 Integrated Storage Element

EK-RF30D-UG

RF30 Integrated Storage Element Installation Guide

EK-RF30D-IN

RF31F Integrated Storage Element User Guide

EK-RF31F-UG

RF31T Integrated Storage Element User Guide

EK-RF31T-UG

RF35E/RF352 Integrated Storage Element User Guide

EK-RF35E-UG

RF35T Integrated Storage Element User Guide

EK-RF35T-UG

RF71 Integrated Storage Element Users Guide

EK-RF71D-UG

RF Series Integrated Storage Element Installation in BA200

EK-RF72D-IM

Series Enclosures

RF Series Integrated Storage Element Pocket Service Guide

EK-RFSIS-PS

RF Series Integrated Storage Element User Guide

EK-RF72D-UG

RRD50 Subsystem Pocket Service Guide

EK-RRD50-PS

RrD50 Digital Disc Drive User’s Guide

EK-RRD50-UG

RWZ01 Magneto Optical Disk Subsystem Maintenance Guide

EK-RWZ01- MG

RWZ01 Magneto Optical Disk Subsystem User’s Guide

EK-RWZ01-UG

RX33 Technical Descripiion Manual

EK-RX33T-TM

Related Documentation

A-3

Document Title

Order Number

Disk and Tape Drives
RX50-D, ~-R Dual Flexible Disk Drive Subsystem Owner’s Manual

EK-LEP01 -OM

RZ58 Integraied Storage Element Users Guide

EK-RZ58-UG

RZ85 Integrat d Storage Element Users Guide

EK-RZ85-UG

RRD40 Subsystem Optical Disc Drive Owner’s Manual

EK-RRD40-OM

SA482 Storage Array Service Manual (for RA82)

EK-5A482-8V

SA482 Storage Array User Guide (for RA82)

EK-8A482-UG

SF106 Storage Array Installation Guide

EK-SF106-IN

Ti'85 Reference Card

EK-OTF85-RC

TF85 Cartridge Tape Subsystem Owner’s Manual

EK-TF85--OM

TF857 Magazine Tape Subsystem Service Manual

EK-TK857-SM

Installing the TF86 Tabletop Cartridge Tape Subsystem

EK-TF86T-IG

Tx86 Tape Drive Operator’s Reference Card

EK-OTK86 RC

Tx86 Series Cartridge Tape Subsystem Owner’s Manual

EK-0OTX86-OM

Tx867 Series Magazine Tape Subsystem Owner’s Manual

EK-TX867-OM

TK50 Tape Drive Subsys: ‘m User’s Guide

EK-LEP05-UG

TK70E-SF & TQK70-SF Installation Guide

EK-TK70E-IN

TK70 Tape Drive Owner’s Manual

EK-OTK70-OM

TKZ60 Cartridge Tape Subsystem User’s Guide

EK-TKZ60-UG

TLZ06 DAT Drive Owner’s Manual

EK-TLZ06-OM

TS05 Tape Transport Pocket Service Guide

EK-TSV05-PS

TS05 Tape Transport Subsystem Technical Manual

EK-TSV05-TM

TS05 Tape Transport System User’s Guide

EK-TSV05-UG

TZ85 Cartridge Tape Subsystem Owner’s Manual

£K-TZ85-OM

TZ85 Reference Card

EK-OTZ85-RC

TZ857 Magazine Tape Subsystem Service Manual

EK-TZ857-SM

A-4

Related Documentation

Documant Title

Order Number

Systems

630QB Maintenance Print Set

MP--02071-01

630QE Maintenance Print Set

MP-02219-01

630QY Maintenance Print Set

MP-02065-01

630QZ Maintenance Print Set

MP-02068-01

BA23 Enclosure Maintenance

EK-186AA-MG

BA123 Enclosure Maintenance

EK-188AA-MG

BA213 Enclosure Maintenance

EK-189AA-MG

BA214 Enclosure Maintenance

EK-190AA-MG

BA215 Enclosure Maintenance

EK-191AA-MG

H9642 Cabinet Maintenance

EK-187AA-MG

H9644 Cabinet Maintenance

EK-221AA-MG

KA630 CPU System Maintenance

EK-178AA-MG

KA640 CPU System Maintenance

EK-179AA-MG

KA650 CPU System Maintenance

EK-180AA-MG

KA675/K A680/KA690 CPU System Maintenance

EK454AA-MG

KDF11-B CPU System Maintenance

EK-245AA-MG

KDJ11-D CPU System Maintenance

EK-247AA-MG

KDJ11-B/S CPU System Maintenance

EK-246AA-MG

MicroPDP-11 Hardware Information Kit (for BA23)

00-ZYAAA-GZ

MicroPDP-11 Hardware Information Kit (for BA123)

00-ZYAAB-GZ

MicroPDP-11 Hardware Information Kit (for H9642)

00-ZYAAE-GZ

MicroPDP-11 Hardware Information Kit (for BA213)

00-ZYAAS-GZ

Microsystems Options

EK-192AB-MG

Microsystems Site Preparation Guide

EK-067AB-PG

MicroVAX Il Hardware Informa‘ion Kit (for RA23)

00-ZNAAA-GZ

MicroVAX II Hardware Information Kit (for BA123)

00-ZNAAB-GZ

MicroVAX Il Hardware Information Kit (for H9642)

00-ZNAAE-GZ

Related Documentation

A-5

Document Title

Order Number

Systams
MicroVAX 3500 Customer Hardware Information Kit

00-ZNAES-GZ

MicroVAX 3600 Customer Hardware Information Kit (for H9644)

00-ZNAEF-GZ

VAXstation 3200 Owner’s Manual (BA23)

EK-154AA-OW

VAXstation 3500 Owner’s Manual (BA213)

EK~171AA-OW

VAXstation I/GPX Owner’s Manual (BA23)

EK-106AA-OW

VAXstation IVGPX Owner’s Manual (BA123)

EK-105AA-OW

Diagnostics
DEC/X11 Reference Card

AV-F145A-MC

DEC/X11 User’s Manual

AC-FO53D-MC

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor Ethernet Server User’s Guide

AA-FNTAF-DN

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor Reference Card

AV-FMXAC-DN

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide

AA-FM7AE-DN

XXDP DEC/X11 Quick Reference Guide

AA-FKB84A-TE

XXDP User’s Manual

AA-FKB83A-TE

Networks
Ethernet Transceiver Tester User’s Manual

EK-ETHTT-UG

VAX/VMS Networking Manual

AA-Y512C-TE

VAX NI Exerciser User’s Guide

AA-HIV6A-TE

HOW TO ORDER ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
From

Call

Write

Alasks, Hawan,
or New Hampshire

6038845660

Digatal Equipment Corporation
P.O. Box CS2008

Rest of U.SA.

800-DIGITAL

and Puerto Rico!

Nashua NH 0306

1Prepaid orders from Puerto Kico, call Digital's local subsidiary (809-754~7575)

Canada

B00-267-~6219

Digita] Equpment of Canada Ltd.

documentataon )

Kanate, Ontano, Canada K2K 2A6

(for sofiware

100 Herzberg Road

Attn: Direct Order Desk

613-592~-5111

ifor hardware
documentation)

Internal orders
(for software
documentation)

DTN 241-3023
508-874-3023

Software Supply Business (SSB)
Digital Equipment Corporation

Internal orders
‘tor hardware
documentation:

DTN: 2344323
50838 1-4323

Publishing & Circulation Services (P&CS)
NROS-1/W3
Digital Equipment Corporation

Westmnster MA 01473

Northbore MA 01532